WO2024066947A1 - Communication method and related device - Google Patents
Communication method and related device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024066947A1 WO2024066947A1 PCT/CN2023/116926 CN2023116926W WO2024066947A1 WO 2024066947 A1 WO2024066947 A1 WO 2024066947A1 CN 2023116926 W CN2023116926 W CN 2023116926W WO 2024066947 A1 WO2024066947 A1 WO 2024066947A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- configuration information
- message
- target
- switching
- terminal device
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 358
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 200
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 claims abstract description 483
- 210000004460 N cell Anatomy 0.000 claims abstract description 166
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 137
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 79
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 78
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 60
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 29
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 102100022734 Acyl carrier protein, mitochondrial Human genes 0.000 claims 2
- 101000678845 Homo sapiens Acyl carrier protein, mitochondrial Proteins 0.000 claims 2
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 49
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 description 44
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 44
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 32
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 29
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 9
- 101100233916 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) KAR5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000013146 percutaneous coronary intervention Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 101000827703 Homo sapiens Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102100023591 Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 101100012902 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) FIG2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006855 networking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004984 smart glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005641 tunneling Effects 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0011—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
- H04W36/0016—Hand-off preparation specially adapted for end-to-end data sessions
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0083—Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
- H04W36/00837—Determination of triggering parameters for hand-off
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related equipment.
- the cell accessed by the terminal device can be switched by cell switching. Before the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a source cell, and after the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a target cell.
- the source cell detects that the signal quality between the source cell and the terminal device has deteriorated, it can send a switching message carrying the configuration information of the target cell, so that the terminal device can access the target cell based on the configuration information of the target cell after receiving the message.
- the network device needs to trigger the sending of the switching message to the terminal device only when it detects that the signal quality has deteriorated.
- the transmission of the switching message may be slow due to the poor signal quality, affecting the speed of cell switching or even causing cell switching failure.
- the present application provides a communication method and related equipment for saving the overhead of triggering a cell switching process and improving the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the communication method is described as being executed by a terminal device.
- the terminal device receives a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message.
- the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching and is sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items: downlink control information (download control information, The information in the short message field in the DCI; the information in the paging occasion (PO); or any broadcast information of N cells.
- downlink control information download control information
- the information in the short message field in the DCI The information in the paging occasion (PO); or any broadcast information of N cells.
- PO paging occasion
- the second message can be implemented through any of the above items.
- the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
- the second message when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
- the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
- all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
- PF paging frame
- the first message containing the switching configuration information of N cells may also include at least one of the above-mentioned indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message by displaying the indication information, and/or instructing to monitor the second message on all POs, so that the terminal device can clarify the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead.
- the sending speed of the second message can be increased, so as to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
- the value of N is 1.
- the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message while also reducing the overhead of the terminal device monitoring the signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
- the handover configuration information is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information.
- CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for triggering the execution of cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol.
- CHO configuration information may also have other names, which are not limited here.
- the second aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the terminal device functions.
- the communication method is described as being executed by a terminal device.
- the terminal device receives a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer; after determining (within a preset time) that a second message has not been received or determining that an indication message indicating that the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been cancelled is received, the terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information, and the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device when a terminal device receives a first message including a switching configuration of N cells, the terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information after determining that a second message (the second message is used to trigger a cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) has not been received or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been received.
- the terminal device can obtain in advance the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered based on the second message, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the network device (for example, the network device does not send the second message, or the network device sends an indication message to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid cell switching failure.
- the handover configuration information is used for a cell handover process triggered by a second message, or the handover configuration information is CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
- the configuration information of N cells carried by the first message can be implemented through the above-mentioned multiple methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
- the third aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a source CU, or the method is executed by some components in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions.
- the communication method is described as being executed by the source CU.
- the source CU determines a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in a target distributed unit (DU); the source CU sends the first message to the terminal device through an IAB node.
- N is a positive integer
- DU target distributed unit
- the first message sent by the source CU to the terminal device through the IAB node includes the switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can subsequently trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching.
- the target DU is located in the IAB node.
- the IAB node to which the terminal device is connected includes a source DU where the source cell is located, and the target DU where the target cell is located is located at the IAB node where the source DU is located.
- the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a direct link (i.e., there is no other IAB node between the two), or the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a non-direct link (i.e., there may be other IAB nodes between the two), which is not limited here.
- the target DU may also be located at other IAB nodes.
- the method further includes: after the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU sends a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU; the source CU receives a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
- the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU can be used as a potential target cell.
- the source CU can obtain the switching configuration information through the interaction of switching request messages and switching response messages with the target CU, so that the source CU can subsequently send a first message containing the switching configuration information to the terminal device.
- the method further includes: the source CU sending the second message to the terminal device.
- the source CU can also send the second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of cell switching based on the second message.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message.
- the second message sent to the terminal device to trigger the execution of cell switching does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the above-mentioned technical solution of triggering cell switching by a second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is going to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not
- the source CU when at least one of the following is met, sends the second message to the terminal device, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the source CU determines that the mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or the source CU receives an indication from the target CU allowing the terminal device to establish an F1 connection based on the target CU.
- the switching configuration information performs cell switching.
- the source CU determines that the terminal device is currently capable of performing cell switching and successfully switching to the N cells under the target DU. To this end, the source CU can send a second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of cell switching based on the received second message.
- the source CU sends the first message when any of the following items is met, including: after the source CU sends a first switching request message to the target CU, it receives a first switching response message from the target CU, and the first switching response message includes switching configuration information of N cells; after the source CU sends a second switching request message to the target CU, it receives a second switching response message from the target CU, and the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; or, after the source CU receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU will be used as a potential target cell.
- the source CU can send a first message containing switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device, so that the switching configuration information of N cells is sent before the switching conditions are met, so that when it is subsequently determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to switch to the N cells and the scheduling message is sent, the signaling consumption of the scheduling message can be saved, so as to improve the success rate of cell switching.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control (RLC) layer configuration information and/or media access control (MAC) layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer configuration information.
- RLC radio link control
- MAC media access control
- PDCP packet data convergence protocol
- SDAP service data adaptation protocol
- the target DU when an F1 connection has not been established between the target DU and the target CU, the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
- the first configuration information including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information
- the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information)
- the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
- the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
- a handover response message eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above
- the source CU determines that the target DU and the target CU have established an F1 connection, including: the source CU determines that the target DU and the target CU have established an F1 connection based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the source CU can determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU through the third indication information sent by the target CU, and further determine that the terminal device can successfully perform cell switching to the target DU based on the switching configuration information.
- the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways.
- the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the DCI of the PDCCH encrypted by P-RNTI; information in the PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
- the second message can be implemented through any of the above items.
- the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
- the second message when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
- the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
- all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
- PF paging frame
- the first message including the switching configuration information of N cells may also include the above at least one indication information.
- the switching configuration information is indicated by displaying the indication information to be used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, and/or, the second message is indicated to be monitored on all POs, so that the terminal device can clearly determine the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead.
- the sending speed of the second message can be increased, so as to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
- the value of N is 1.
- the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message while also reducing the overhead of the terminal device monitoring the signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
- the handover configuration information is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information.
- CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for triggering the execution of cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol.
- CHO configuration information may also have other names, which are not limited here.
- the method further includes: the source CU sends indication information to the terminal device indicating that the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is cancelled.
- the source CU may also implicitly indicate cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information in other ways, for example, the source CU does not send the second message (within a preset time period).
- the terminal device can obtain in advance the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the source CU (for example, the source CU does not send the second message, or the source CU sends an indication information to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid cell switching failure.
- the fourth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a target CU, or the method is executed by some components in the target CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the target CU functions.
- the communication method is described as being executed by the target CU.
- the target CU determines third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU.
- the target CU can determine that the terminal device can switch to the N cells contained in the target DU based on the cell switching process.
- the target CU sends a third indication information to the source CU indicating that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, so that the source CU can determine that the terminal device can be triggered to perform cell switching based on the third indication information.
- the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, so that the terminal device can subsequently trigger the cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching.
- the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell
- the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, in order to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the above-mentioned technical solution of triggering cell switching by a second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is going to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can obtain the gain of saving the overhead of the triggering process and improving the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the
- the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways.
- the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
- the target CU sending the third indication information to the source CU includes: after the target CU determines that the target DU has configured the context of the terminal device, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU.
- the target CU can determine that the terminal device can access the network through the N cells contained in the target DU. To this end, the target CU can send the third indication information to the source CU, so that the source CU schedules the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU.
- the method before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: the target CU receives a second switching request message from the source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the target CU sends a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells.
- the target CU and the source CU can interact through the second switching request message and the second switching response message, so that the target CU determines the corresponding switching configuration information based on the N unactivated cells, and then sends the switching configuration information to the terminal device through the source CU, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
- the method before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: after the target CU receives the first configuration information from the source centralized unit CU, sending switching configuration information of N cells to the source CU, the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes RLC layer configuration information and/or MAC layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes PDCP layer configuration information and/or SDAP layer configuration information.
- the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
- the first configuration information including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information
- the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information)
- the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so
- the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
- a handover response message eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above
- the fifth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a first CU, or the method is executed by some components in the first CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first CU.
- the communication method is described as being executed by the first CU.
- the first CU determines third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first DU; wherein the first DU is located at an IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and an MT; the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the first CU when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is a radio resource control (RRC) connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the first CU can send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information.
- RRC radio resource control
- the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case that the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case that the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case that the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation that the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
- the third configuration information is carried in an F1 application protocol (F1application protocol, F1AP) message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- F1 application protocol F1application protocol, F1AP
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new radio cell global identifier (NCGI), a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier (PCI) of a cell in the first DU.
- NCGI new radio cell global identifier
- CU identifier used to determine the NCGI
- PCI physical cell identifier
- the third configuration information sent by the first CU to the IAB node may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of NCGI, PCI, or other configuration information, which is not limited here.
- the method after the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node, the method also includes: the first CU receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to indicate that the first CU sends a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU, or to indicate that the first DU has sent a third message determined based on the third configuration information.
- the first DU when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows clearly that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU. Subsequently, the first CU may schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
- a communication method is provided, which is executed by an IAB node, or the method is executed by some components in the IAB node (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the IAB node.
- the communication method is described as being executed by an IAB node.
- the IAB node receives third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the IAB node sends a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information.
- the IAB node when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is an RRC connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the IAB node receives the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) from the first CU, so that the first DU can send a third message based on the third configuration information.
- the third configuration information of the first DU i.e., other DUs except the second DU
- the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU through the RRC connection again, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
- the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
- the third configuration information sent by the first CU to the IAB node may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, which is used to determine the CU of NCGI. Identification, PCI, or other configuration information is not limited here.
- the first DU sends a third message when at least one of the following items is met, including: the MT of the IAB node determines that the cell switching execution condition is met, and the target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU; the first DU of the IAB node determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or the IAB node detects that the PCI of any cell under the first DU conflicts with other PCIs.
- the first DU when the first DU determines that at least one of the above items is satisfied, the first DU can determine that communication can be performed based on the third configuration information. To this end, the first DU can send a third message obtained based on the third configuration information.
- the method after the first DU sends the third message, the method also includes: the first DU sends fourth indication information to the first CU, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to the terminal device connected to the first DU.
- the first DU when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows clearly that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU. Subsequently, the first CU may schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
- the third message includes a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block (SS/PBCH block) (which may be referred to as SS/PBCH block or SSB for short) sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- SS/PBCH block synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block
- F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the lower-level communication node (such as a terminal device or other IAB node).
- the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the upper-level communication node (such as CU or other IAB nodes), which is not limited here.
- a communication device which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the communication device is described as an example of execution as a terminal device.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the processing unit is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the transceiver unit receives the second message.
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items:
- the first message further includes at least one of the following:
- first indication information indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message
- the second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the value of N is 1.
- the switching configuration information is conditional switching CHO configuration information.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- a communication device which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
- the communication device is described as an example of execution as a terminal device.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer; the processing unit is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that the second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
- the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
- the switching configuration information is conditional switching CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the ninth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is a source CU, or the device is a partial component in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions.
- the communication device is described as an example of execution as a source CU.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit is used to send the first message to the terminal device through the access backhaul integrated IAB node.
- the target DU is located in the IAB node.
- the transceiver unit is also used to send a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU after the processing unit determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU; the transceiver unit is also used to receive a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
- the transceiver unit is further used to send the second message to the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit when at least one of the following items is met, sends the second message to the terminal device, including:
- the processing unit determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU;
- the processing unit determines that the mobile terminal MT in the IAB node is to be switched to the target CU; or,
- the processing unit determines that receiving an indication from the target CU allows the terminal device to perform a cell switch based on the switching configuration information.
- the transceiver unit when any of the following items is met, sends the first message, including:
- the processing unit determines that after the transceiver unit sends the first handover request message to the target CU, a first handover response message is received from the target CU, where the first handover response message includes handover configuration information of N cells;
- the processing unit receives a second switching response message from the target CU after determining that the transceiver unit sends a second switching request message to the target CU, wherein the second switching request message includes identifiers of N cells and the N cells are inactivated cells; or,
- the processing unit determines that after the transceiver unit receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- the determination unit is specifically used to determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items:
- the first message further includes at least one of the following:
- first indication information indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message
- the second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the value of N is 1.
- the method further includes:
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the third aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the third aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the tenth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is a target CU, or the device is a partial component in the target CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the target CU functions.
- the communication device is described as an example of execution as a target CU.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine a third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with a target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs a cell switch based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on a second message; the transceiver unit is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
- the transceiver unit is specifically used to send the third indication information to the source CU after the processing unit determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive a second switching request message from a source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message including the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit is also used to send a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message including the switching configuration information of the N cells.
- the transceiver unit is also used to send switching configuration information of N cells to the source centralized unit CU after receiving the first configuration information from the source CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fourth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fourth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- a communication device which is a source CU, or the device is a partial component in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions.
- the communication device is described as an example of execution as a source CU.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of a first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at an access backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the transceiver unit is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
- NCGI new wireless cell global identifier
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive fourth indication information, which is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fifth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fifth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- a twelfth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is an IAB node, or the device is a partial component (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.) in the IAB node, or the device can also be a logic device capable of realizing all or part of the functions of the IAB node.
- the communication device is described as an IAB node.
- the device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit, the transceiver unit is used to receive third configuration information, the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the processing unit is used to determine a third message, the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the transceiver unit is also used to send a third message.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
- the transceiver unit when at least one of the following items is met, sends the third message, including:
- the processing unit determines that a cell switching execution condition is met, and a target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU;
- the processing unit determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or,
- the processing unit determines that a PCI of any cell under the first DU is detected to conflict with other PCIs.
- the transceiver unit is also used to send fourth indication information to the first CU, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the first DU.
- the third message includes an SSB sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the sixth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the sixth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects.
- a thirteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory; the memory is used to store programs or instructions; wherein the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions so that the device implements the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
- a fourteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to execute the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
- a fifteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores instructions.
- the instructions When the instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects above and any possible implementation method thereof.
- a sixteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program), which includes a computer program code.
- the computer program code When the computer program code is executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
- a seventeenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in any one of the first to sixth aspects above and any possible implementation methods thereof.
- the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the first communication device.
- the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
- the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.
- An eighteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes at least two of the communication device of the fourth aspect, the communication device of the fifth aspect, and the communication device of the sixth aspect.
- the communication system includes a source CU and a terminal device, and optionally, the communication system also includes a target CU.
- the terminal device is used to execute the method in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible implementation thereof
- the source CU is used to execute the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation thereof
- the target CU is used to execute the method in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation thereof.
- the communication system includes a first CU and an IAB node, wherein the first CU is used to execute the method in the fifth aspect and any possible implementation thereof, and the IAB node is used to execute the method in the sixth aspect and any possible implementation thereof.
- a terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message.
- the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching and is sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device
- the first CU may send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information.
- RRC radio resource control
- the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
- FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application.
- FIG1b is another schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application.
- FIG2 a is a schematic diagram of IAB node migration across CUs
- FIG2 b is another schematic diagram of IAB node cross-CU migration
- FIG3 is another schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG5 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG6 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG7 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG8 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG9 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG10 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG11 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
- FIG13 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
- FIG14 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application.
- FIG. 15 is another schematic diagram of the communication device provided in the present application.
- Terminal device It can be a wireless terminal device that can receive network device scheduling and instruction information.
- the wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem.
- the terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via the radio access network (RAN).
- the terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal equipment, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone, mobile phone), a computer and a data card.
- a mobile terminal equipment such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone, mobile phone), a computer and a data card.
- it can be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile device that exchanges voice and/or data with the radio access network.
- PCS personal communication service
- SIP session initiation protocol
- WLL wireless local loop
- PDA personal digital assistants
- Pad tablet computers with wireless transceiver functions and other devices.
- Wireless terminal equipment can also be called system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station (MS), remote station, access point (AP), remote terminal equipment (remote terminal), access terminal equipment (access terminal), user terminal equipment (user terminal), user agent (user agent), subscriber station (SS), customer premises equipment (CPE), terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), etc.
- the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
- Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc., which are a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design and develop wearable devices for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
- a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also powerful functions achieved through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
- wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, etc., as well as those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc.
- the terminal can also be a drone, a robot, a terminal in device-to-device (D2D) communication, a terminal in vehicle to everything (V2X), a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical, a wireless terminal in smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, etc.
- D2D device-to-device
- V2X vehicle to everything
- VR virtual reality
- AR augmented reality
- the terminal device may also be a terminal device in a communication system that evolves after the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system (e.g., a sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) communication system, etc.) or a terminal device in a future-evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc.
- 5G fifth generation
- 6G sixth generation
- PLMN public land mobile network
- the 6G network can further expand the form and function of the 5G communication terminal
- the 6G terminal includes but is not limited to a car, a cellular network terminal (with integrated satellite terminal function), a drone, and an Internet of Things (IoT) device.
- IoT Internet of Things
- the network equipment can be a RAN node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, which can also be called a base station.
- RAN equipment are: base station gNB (gNodeB) in a 5G communication system, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU).
- the network equipment can include a centralized unit (CU) node, a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
- CU centralized unit
- DU distributed unit
- RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
- the network device may be any other device that provides wireless communication functions for the terminal device.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form used by the network device. For the convenience of description, the embodiments of the present application do not limit.
- the device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, which may be installed in the network device.
- the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device as an example that the network device is used as the device.
- Configuration and pre-configuration are used at the same time.
- Configuration refers to the network device/server sending some parameter configuration information or parameter values to the terminal through messages or signaling, so that the terminal can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information.
- Pre-configuration is similar to configuration, and can be parameter information or parameter values pre-negotiated between the network device/server and the terminal device, or parameter information or parameter values used by the base station/network device or terminal device specified by the standard protocol, or parameter information or parameter values pre-stored in the base station/server or terminal device. This application does not limit this.
- the paging sent by the network device to the terminal device has two main functions: one is paging (for example, for the terminal device in the RRC idle state (RRC_IDLE) and the RRC inactive state (RRC_INACTIVE)), and the other is system message update (for example, for the terminal device in the RRC connected state (RRC_CONNECTED)).
- the content of the Paging message (paging message) is sent to the terminal device through the physical downlink service channel (PDSCH) resource location, and the PDSCH resource is indicated by the P-RNTI (where P-RNTI is a fixed value for the entire network) scrambled PDCCH.
- P-RNTI where P-RNTI is a fixed value for the entire network
- the terminal device in order to obtain the Paging message, the terminal device must first wake up periodically to monitor the PDCCH channel scrambled by P-RNTI, and then parse the DCI to further obtain the time-frequency location of the PDSCH channel.
- the terminal device parses the content of the Paging message at the corresponding PDSCH channel location.
- the DCI field contains fields such as short message indicator and short message.
- Short message is mainly used to indicate system information updates other than paging. After receiving the system message update indication in the short message field in the DCI, the terminal device will receive new system messages in the next modification period.
- the frequency domain resources occupied by the Paging message are specified by the PDCCH scrambled by P-RNTI.
- the terminal device will try to receive the Paging message at the PO of a specific frame (called PF) within its Paging cycle, so the network device needs to send the Paging message from the air interface at this moment, so that the terminal device can receive the Paging message at this moment.
- PF is a radio frame, which may contain one or more POs.
- PO is a collection of PDCCH monitoring occasions, which may contain multiple slots (or frames, subframes, symbols, etc.), on which there may be a PDCCH scrambled by P-RNTI and indicating the Paging message.
- DRX cycle DRX cycle
- Paging cycle Paging cycle
- the PF and PO used for paging are determined in the following manner.
- the system message update can be indicated by the short message field in the DCI used to indicate the frequency domain position of the paging message.
- the PF and PO of each terminal device are related to its own UE_ID.
- the terminal device will detect PDCCH on the PF and PO related to its own UE_ID, receive DCI, and then receive the paging message.
- the terminal device will only receive in one PO in a DRX cycle.
- the network device knows the PO of each terminal device. When the network device wants to page a terminal device, it will send a Paging message in the time domain resources of its corresponding PO. If the network device wants to broadcast system message updates to all terminal devices, it will send a Paging message in the PO time domain resources of all terminal devices.
- IAB Integrated access and backhaul
- IAB technology can use wireless transmission solutions for both access links (Access Link) and backhaul links (Backhaul Link), which can reduce fiber optic deployment; and can meet the needs of increased network capacity, wider coverage, ultra-high reliability and ultra-low latency.
- Access Link access links
- Backhaul Link backhaul links
- the relay node In the IAB network, the relay node, or IAB-node, can provide wireless access services for terminal devices.
- the service data of the terminal device is transmitted by the IAB-node to the IAB host (IAB-donor) through the wireless backhaul link.
- the IAB-node consists of an MT part and a DU part.
- the IAB-donor is an access network element with complete base station (such as gNB) functions, including CU and DU.
- the IAB-donor is connected to the core network that serves the terminal device (for example, connected to the 5G core network).
- the IAB network will be introduced below in conjunction with the implementation examples shown in FIG. 1a and FIG. 1b .
- FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a wireless relay scenario.
- the terminal devices include UE1 and UE2, and the IAB nodes include IAB Node 1 to IAB Node 5, and an IAB donor node.
- One or more IAB-nodes may be included in a transmission path between any UE and an IAB-donor.
- Each IAB-node needs to maintain a wireless backhaul link to the parent node, and also needs to maintain a wireless link with the child node. If the child node of the IAB-node is a terminal device (such as UE1 or UE2 in FIG1a), the wireless access link is between the IAB-node and the child node (ie, the UE).
- the wireless backhaul link is between the IAB-node and the child node (ie, the other IAB-node).
- the wireless backhaul link is between the IAB-node and the child node (ie, the other IAB-node).
- UE1 accesses IAB-node4 through a wireless access link
- IAB-node4 is connected to IAB-node3 through a wireless backhaul link
- IAB-node3 is connected to IAB-node1 through a wireless backhaul link
- IAB-node1 is connected to IAB-donor through a wireless backhaul link.
- FIG. 1b it is a schematic diagram of realizing a wireless relay scenario through standalone (SA) networking.
- the communication nodes include the 5G core network (5G core, 5GC), the 5G access network equipment (denoted as gNodeB in the figure), the IAB-donor, and one or more IAB-nodes.
- the IAB-node DU (hereinafter simply referred to as IAB-DU) is logically connected to the IAB-donor CU (hereinafter simply referred to as CU) through the F1 interface.
- connection between the IAB-DU and the CU is realized through the NR Uu interface between the IAB-node MT and the parent node DU of each hop, but because the IAB-DU can communicate with the CU in the end, it can be considered that the F1 interface exists logically.
- the F1 interface supports a user plane protocol (F1-user plane, F1-U) and a control plane protocol (F1-control plane, F1-C), wherein the user plane protocol includes one or more of the following protocol layers: general packet radio service tunneling protocol user plane (GTP-U), user datagram protocol (UDP), internet protocol (IP) and other protocol layers.
- the control plane protocol includes one or more of the following: F1 application protocol (F1AP), stream control transport protocol (SCTP), IP and other protocol layers.
- F1-C interface management, IAB-DU management, and UE context-related configuration can be performed between the IAB-donor and the IAB-node.
- F1-U user plane data transmission can be performed between the IAB-donor and the IAB-node, and Downlink transmission status feedback and other functions.
- Inter-CU migration In the IAB network, for any IAB node between the terminal device and the IAB-donor node, inter-CU migration is supported.
- the IAB node where the migration occurs can be called a boundary node
- the cross-CU migration is divided into two scenarios: partial migration and full migration, depending on whether an F1 connection needs to be established with the target CU.
- FIG. 2 a it is an implementation example of a switching process of partial migration, where the boundary node is IAB-node2.
- the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU passes through IAB-node4 (including IAB-MT4 and IAB-DU4 in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure), IAB-node1 (including IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1 in the figure) and Donor-DU1.
- the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU passes through IAB-node4 (including IAB-MT4 and IAB-DU4 in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure), IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3 and IAB-DU3 in the figure) and Donor-DU1 respectively.
- IAB-MT2 before partial migration, there is an RRC connection between IAB-MT2 and CU1, an F1 interface between IAB-DU2 and CU1, and IAB-node2 and IAB-donor communicate through the source path (through IAB-node1 composed of IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1).
- IAB-MT2 undergoes cross-CU cell switching and establishes an RRC connection with CU2.
- IAB-DU2 still maintains the F1 interface with CU1 and does not establish the F1 interface with CU2.
- CU1 and CU2 are respectively called the terminating CU on the F1 interface (F1-terminating CU) and the non-terminating CU on the F1 interface (non-F1-terminating CU). It should be noted that data does not pass through CU2 when transmitted on this path. CU1 and Donor-DU2 communicate directly through the IP network.
- the boundary node is IAB-node3.
- the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU passes through IAB-DU3a and IAB-MT3 in IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3, IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b in the figure), IAB-node1 (including IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1 in the figure) and Donor-DU1.
- the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU passes through IAB-DU3b and IAB-MT3 in IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3, IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure) and Donor-DU1.
- the path after the switch can be called the target path.
- IAB-DU3 is expanded into two logical DUs, namely IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b.
- IAB-DU3a always maintains the F1 interface with CU1
- IAB-DU3b is used to establish a new F1 interface with CU2.
- DU3a and DU3b can be regarded as two DUs, each with an F1 interface.
- the terminal device needs to perform a switch from the cell under IAB-DU3a to the cell under IAB-DU3b.
- Full migration includes the following three implementation methods.
- the first few steps are similar to partial migration.
- MT3 is switched to establish cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3a and CU1.
- CU2 helps to establish cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3a and CU1, it also establishes F1-C and F1-U between DU3b and CU2.
- the terminal device is switched to DU3b, and the terminal device can communicate with CU2 directly on the target path.
- the cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3b and CU2 are established to enable the terminal device to switch to DU3b, and the control plane and user plane data transmission between DU3b and CU2 through IAB-Node1 and Donor-DU1 are established.
- a switching command is sent to MT or the switching command of MT is effective, and then F1-C/F1-U is established on the target path, so that the traffic of the terminal device can be migrated to the target path.
- a cross-topology F1-C is established between DU3b and CU2 (only cross-topology F1-C is established to allow CU2 to switch the terminal device to DU3b when making a switching decision, but cross-topology F1-U is not established, and cross-topology data transmission is not performed), so that the terminal device can be allowed to switch to DU3b.
- the switching command is immediately sent to the MT or the switching command of the MT is effective, and then F1-C/F1-U is directly established on the target path so that the traffic of the terminal device can be migrated to the target path.
- partial migration can be used.
- the F1 interface can be transmitted over a different path without changing the anchor point of the F1 interface.
- system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application can be used interchangeably.
- “Multiple” refers to two or more.
- “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist.
- a and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the objects associated with each other are in an "or” relationship.
- At least one of the following” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
- “at least one of A, B and C” includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC.
- the ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system 1000 used in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200.
- the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300.
- the wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (which may also be understood as a network device introduced in the foregoing text, such as 110a and 110b in FIG3 ), and may also include at least one terminal (which may also be understood as a terminal device introduced in the foregoing text, such as 120a-120j in FIG3 ).
- the wireless access network device may be a macro base station (such as 110a in FIG3 ), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in FIG3 ), or a relay node or a donor node, etc.
- wireless access network device in the present application may also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform).
- a platform such as a cloud platform.
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the wireless access network device.
- a base station is used as a wireless access network device, and a terminal device is recorded as a terminal as an example for description. It can be understood that when the communication system includes an IAB network, the base station can be an IAB node.
- the base station and the terminal can be fixed or movable.
- the base station and the terminal can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted, or on the water surface, or on aircraft, balloons, and artificial satellites in the air.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the base station and the terminal.
- the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 3 may be configured as a mobile base station.
- the terminal 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i
- the terminal 120i is a base station.
- the base station 110a 120i is a terminal, that is, 110a and 120i communicate through a wireless air interface protocol.
- 110a and 120i may also communicate through an interface protocol between base stations.
- relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, base stations and terminals may be collectively referred to as communication devices.
- 110a and 110b in FIG. 3 may be referred to as communication devices with base station functions
- 120a-120j in FIG. 3 may be referred to as communication devices with terminal functions.
- Communication between base stations and terminals, between base stations and base stations, and between terminals and terminals can be carried out through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both. Communication can be carried out through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz at the same time.
- GHz gigahertz
- the embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
- the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function.
- the control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the application scenarios of the above-mentioned terminals such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
- the functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.
- the base station sends a downlink signal (or downlink information) to the terminal, and the downlink signal (or downlink information) is carried on a downlink channel.
- the terminal sends an uplink signal (or uplink information) to the base station, and the uplink signal (or uplink information) is carried on an uplink channel.
- the present application can be applied to a long term evolution (LTE) system, a new radio (NR) system, or a communication system evolved after 5G (such as 6G, etc.).
- LTE long term evolution
- NR new radio
- 5G 5G
- the communication system includes a network device and a terminal device.
- the cell accessed by the terminal device can be switched by cell switching. Before the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a source cell, and after the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a target cell.
- the source cell detects that the signal quality between the source cell and the terminal device has deteriorated, it can send a switching message carrying the configuration information of the target cell, so that the terminal device can access the target cell based on the configuration information of the target cell after receiving the message.
- the network device needs to trigger the sending of the switching message to the terminal device only when it detects that the signal quality has deteriorated.
- the transmission of the switching message may be slow due to the poor signal quality, affecting the speed of cell switching or even causing cell switching failure.
- the network device can send CHO configuration information that needs to be triggered based on a measurement event to the terminal device before the signal quality deteriorates, so that after the terminal device determines that the signal quality has deteriorated locally based on the measurement event, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the CHO configuration information, which can speed up the switching speed of the terminal device and, to a certain extent, avoid the switching failure that may be caused by the switching preparation only after the signal quality deteriorates in the traditional switching process.
- this implementation still positions the triggering method of cell switching in the scenario of signal quality deterioration, and when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, in the scenario shown in FIG.
- the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the newly configured cell in the IAB-DU3b corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be closed or deactivated, etc.), the CHO configuration information triggered based on the measurement event will not take effect, and still cannot achieve the effect of improving the cell switching speed to improve the cell switching success rate.
- the present application provides a communication method and related devices for saving the overhead of triggering the cell switching process, improving the execution speed of the cell switching, and thereby improving the success rate of the cell switching.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- the source CU determines the first message.
- the source CU determines a first message in step S401, where the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device through the IAB node in step S402, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S402.
- the target DU is located at the IAB node.
- the IAB node to which the terminal device is connected includes the source DU where the source cell is located, and the target DU where the target cell is located is located at the IAB node where the source DU is located, the solution can be applied to the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching between different DUs in the same IAB node (or the scenario where the IAB node undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled).
- the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a direct link (i.e., there is no other IAB node between the two), or the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a non-direct link (i.e., there may be other IAB nodes between the two), which is not limited here.
- the target DU may also be located at other IAB nodes.
- the first message sent by the source CU in step S402 further includes at least one of the following: a first indication message Information indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message; or, second indication information indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
- the first message containing the switching configuration information of N cells may also include at least one of the above-mentioned indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message by displaying the indication information, and/or indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs, so that the terminal device can clearly determine the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
- all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
- PF paging frame
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead.
- the sending speed of the second message can be increased, in order to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
- the value of N is 1.
- the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message and also reduce the overhead of the terminal device monitoring signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
- the handover configuration information included in the first message sent by the source CU in step S402 is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information.
- the handover configuration information included in the first message is CHO configuration information
- the trigger condition corresponding to the CHO configuration information is triggered based on the second message.
- the CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for executing cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol. In future standards/protocols, the CHO configuration information may have other names, which are not limited here.
- the method further includes: after the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU sends a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU; the source CU receives a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
- the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU
- the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU can be used as a potential target cell.
- the source CU can obtain the switching configuration information through the interaction of the switching request message and the switching response message with the target CU, so that the source CU can subsequently send a first message containing the switching configuration information to the terminal device.
- the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs a cell switch based on the switching configuration information.
- the source CU can determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU through the third indication information sent by the target CU, and further determine that the terminal device can successfully perform a cell switch to the target DU based on the switching configuration information.
- the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways.
- the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
- the source CU sends the first message in step S402, including:
- the source CU After the source CU sends a first handover request message to the target CU, the source CU receives a first handover response message from the target CU, where the first handover response message includes handover configuration information of N cells (for ease of reference in the following text, this method is referred to as method A);
- the source CU After the source CU sends a second handover request message to the target CU, the source CU receives a second handover response message from the target CU, where the second handover request message includes identifiers of N cells, and the N cells are inactivated cells (for ease of reference in the following text, this method is referred to as method B); or,
- the source CU After the source CU receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information (for ease of reference below, this method is recorded as method C).
- the source CU and the target CU can interact through the first handover request message and the first handover response message, so that the source CU can obtain the handover configuration information of the N cells under the target DU. Accordingly, after the source CU obtains the configuration information of the N cells, the source CU can send a packet to the terminal device in step S402.
- the first message contains the configuration information of the N cells.
- the moment when the F1 connection between the target CU and the target DU is completed is before the moment when the source CU sends the configuration information to the terminal device in step S402, and this solution can be applied to the full nested and gradual bottom-up processes of full migration.
- the target DU is ready, and the N cells under the target DU can be configured as potential target cells of the terminal device in the first message.
- the source CU may determine that the N cells under the target CU are potential target cells of the terminal device. To this end, the source CU and the target CU may interact through a first switching request message and a second switching response message to inform the target CU that the target DU may switch to the target CU. After that, the source CU may send a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
- the moment when the F1 connection between the target CU and the target DU is completed is after the moment when the source CU sends the configuration information to the terminal device in step S402, and this solution can be applied to the gradual top-down process of full migration.
- the F1 connection between the target DU and the target CU is established almost at the end. If you want to get the gain of the configuration information of N cells configured in advance, you need to send the first message containing the configuration information of N cells in advance. At the time of sending the first message in step S402, the N cells in the target DU have not been activated, and the real switching preparation process cannot be performed at present.
- the source CU may obtain the first configuration information from the target DU and send the first configuration information to the target CU to inform the target CU that the target DU may switch to the target CU, so that the target CU determines the configuration information of N cells based on the first configuration information and sends it to the source CU. Accordingly, after the source CU obtains the configuration information of the N cells, the source CU may send a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer configuration information and/or media access control (media access control, MAC) layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer configuration information.
- the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information) of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information, and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
- the first configuration information including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information
- the target CU determines the switching configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information) of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information
- the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
- the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
- a handover response message eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above
- the RRC reconfiguration message (carrying the CHO switching command) sent by the source CU to the terminal device needs to carry the RLC layer, MAC layer configuration, and PDCP layer and SDAP layer configuration after the target cell (for example, the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) information element in the RRC reconfiguration message carries the RLC layer and MAC layer configuration of the target cell, and the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) information element in the RRC reconfiguration message includes the PDCP layer and SDAP layer configuration after the terminal device reaches the target cell).
- the terminal device needs to know the configuration of multiple protocol stacks after switching to the target cell.
- the RLC layer and MAC layer configurations need to be generated by the target DU, and the higher-layer PDCP layer and SDAP layer need to be generated by the target CU.
- the technical solution provided by method C is required to enable the terminal device to obtain the RLC layer, MAC layer configuration, and PDCP layer and SDAP layer configurations.
- an F1 connection is established between the target DU and the source CU so that the first configuration information of the N cells in the target DU can be sent to the source CU, and then sent to the target CU via the source CU.
- the complete configuration information of the N cells is sent to the source CU (for example, the configuration information of the N cells is carried in a radio resource control container (RRC Container)), and then the source CU sends a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
- RRC Container radio resource control container
- the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU will be used as a potential target cell.
- the source CU can send a first message containing switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device.
- the switching configuration information of N cells is sent before the switching conditions are met, so that when it is subsequently determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to switch to the N cells and the scheduling message is sent, the signaling consumption of the scheduling message can be saved, thereby improving the success rate of cell switching.
- the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device.
- the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device in step S403, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second message in step S403.
- the second message sent by the source CU in step S403 includes the first information, which is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information (DCI) of the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier (P-RNTI); information in the paging occasion (PO); or, any broadcast information of N cells.
- the second message can be implemented by any of the above items.
- the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching by any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
- the second message when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
- the source CU when at least one of the following conditions is met, sends the second message to the terminal device in step S403, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the source CU determines that the mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or the source CU receives an indication from the target CU to allow the terminal device to perform a cell switch based on the switching configuration information. Specifically, when at least one of the above conditions is met, the source CU determines that the terminal device is currently able to perform a cell switch and successfully switch to the N cells under the target DU. To this end, the source CU may send a second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of a cell switch based on the received second message.
- the source CU may send a second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of a cell switch based on the received second message.
- the terminal device performs cell switching.
- step S404 the cell switching process of step S404 is triggered, that is, the terminal device is triggered to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information received in step S402.
- the terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells in step S402, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message in step S403, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information in step S404.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message.
- the second message for triggering the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device
- the process of the source CU sending the first message in step S402 and/or the process of the source CU sending the second message in step S403 may need to rely on the indication of the target CU.
- the following will be described in detail based on the implementation shown in FIG5 .
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application.
- the method includes the following steps.
- the target CU determines third indication information.
- the target CU determines the third indication information in step S501, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is allowed to The cell switching is performed according to the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer.
- the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways.
- the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
- the target CU sends third indication information to the source CU.
- the target CU after the target CU determines the third indication information in step S501, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502.
- the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502, including: after the target CU determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU. Specifically, after the target CU determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device, the target CU can determine that the terminal device can access the network through the N cells included in the target DU. For this purpose, the target CU can send the third indication information to the source CU, so that the source CU schedules the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU.
- the method before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502, the method also includes: the target CU receives a second switching request message from the source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the target CU sends a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells.
- the target CU and the source CU can interact through the second switching request message and the second switching response message, so that after the target CU determines the corresponding switching configuration information based on the N unactivated cells, the target CU sends the switching configuration information to the terminal device through the source CU, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
- the method before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: after the target CU receives the first configuration information from the source centralized unit CU, the target CU sends the switching configuration information of N cells to the source CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so that the terminal device can subsequently perform the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
- the first configuration information including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information
- the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information)
- the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so
- the embodiment shown in FIG5 is an optional implementation process of the embodiment shown in FIG4 , and the source CU receiving the third indication information in step S502 can be used as a trigger condition for the source CU to trigger the execution of step S504, that is, the execution order of step S502 is before step S504.
- the source CU receiving the third indication information in step S502 can be used as a trigger condition for the source CU to trigger the execution of step S505, that is, the execution order of step S502 is before step S505.
- the source CU determines the first message.
- the source CU determines a first message in step S503, where the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device in step S504, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S504.
- the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device.
- the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device in step S505, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second message in step S505.
- the terminal device performs cell switching.
- step S506 the cell switching process of step S506 is triggered, that is, the terminal device is triggered to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information received in step S505.
- step S503 to step S506 can refer to the implementation process of the aforementioned step S401 to step S404, and achieve corresponding technical effects, which will not be repeated here.
- the target CU can determine that the terminal device can switch to the N cells contained in the target DU based on the cell switching process.
- the target CU sends a third indication information to the source CU indicating that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, so that the source CU can determine that the terminal device can be triggered to perform cell switching based on the third indication information.
- the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, so that the terminal device can subsequently trigger the cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching.
- the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell
- the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, in order to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
- FIG6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- the source CU determines the first message.
- the source CU determines a first message in step S503, where the first message includes handover configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
- the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device in step S504, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S504.
- the terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device when the terminal device receives indication information indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information or determines that the second message is not received, the terminal device determines to ignore or delete the switching configuration information received in step S602.
- the source CU sends an indication message to the terminal device indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the source CU (for example, the source CU does not send the second message, or the source CU sends an indication message to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid the failure of the cell switching.
- the source CU may also implicitly indicate cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information in other ways, for example, the source CU does not send the second message (within a preset time period).
- the handover configuration information is used for the cell handover process triggered by the second message, or the handover configuration information is CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
- the implementation process of step S601 and step S602 can refer to the implementation process of step S401 to step S402 shown in the aforementioned FIG. 4, and achieve the corresponding technical effect, which will not be described in detail here.
- the terminal device receives a first message including the switching configuration of N cells in step S602, and the terminal device determines in step S603 that the second message (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) has not been received or determines that the indication information indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been received, and then ignores or deletes the switching configuration information.
- the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered based on the second message in advance, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the network device (for example, the network device does not send the second message, or the network device sends the indication information to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid the failure of the cell switching.
- the moment when the former occurs may be before the moment when the latter occurs (such as the aforementioned method A).
- This situation will be exemplarily described in the scenario shown in FIG. 2 b in combination with the example shown in FIG. 7 .
- the time when the former occurs may be after the time when the latter occurs (such as the aforementioned method B and method C).
- This situation will be exemplified in the scenario shown in FIG. 2 b in combination with the examples shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 .
- the terminal device is recorded as UE
- the source CU is recorded as CU1
- the target CU is recorded as CU2
- the source DU is DU3a
- the target DU is DU3b for illustration.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- CU2 sends an F1 connection response message to the IAB node.
- the IAB node receives the F1 connection response message from CU2 in this step.
- step 1 the F1-C interface between DU3b and CU2 is established, and CU2 sends an F1SETUP RESPONSE message to DU3b.
- CU2 sends third indication information to CU1.
- CU1 receives the third indication information from CU2 in this step.
- step 2 CU2 informs CU1 that DU3b is ready to send a handover request for the UE (not limited to a CHO handover request).
- the UE sends a measurement report to CU1. Accordingly, CU1 receives the measurement report from the UE in this step.
- step 3 CU1 receives the measurement report from the UE.
- This step is optional because DU3b and DU3a are logical DUs under the same physical DU, and the cells under DU3b may correspond to the cells under DU3a. In this case, the target cell of the UE can be directly specified without measurement.
- step 3 is an optional step.
- CU1 sends a switching request message to CU2.
- CU2 receives the switching request message from CU1 in this step.
- CU2 sends a handover response message to CU1.
- CU1 receives a handover response message from CU2 in this step.
- Steps 4 to 6 are the CHO handover preparation process of the UE between CU1 and CU2.
- CU1 sends a first message to the UE.
- the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
- step 7 CU1 sends a first message to the UE, where the first message may be an RRC message (may be carried in a CHO handover command message).
- the RRC message carries at least one of the following information:
- 1) contains two layers of information. First, it informs the UE that this CHO will be triggered, which is different from the traditional CHO based on self-judgment. Second, it informs the UE that this CHO will be triggered by broadcast, not unicast.
- the above two layers of information may not appear at the same time, and the hierarchy needs to be reflected when writing the authority.
- step 7 After receiving the RRC message in step 7, the UE monitors the PDCCH on all possible PFs and POs. In other words, step 7 may also optionally instruct the UE to monitor the PDCCH on all possible PFs and POs.
- the IAB node sends a measurement report to CU1.
- CU1 receives the measurement report from the IAB node in this step.
- CU1 determines whether MT switching needs to be performed.
- CU1 determines that MT3 meets the switching condition based on the measurement report of MT3.
- steps 9 to 10 are optional steps.
- CU1 sends indication information indicating the cancellation of switching to the UE.
- the UE receives indication information indicating the cancellation of switching from CU1 in this step.
- step 11 if MT3 still does not meet the switching conditions, it is considered that full migration may not be executed.
- the network can send an indication message to the UE (for example, the indication message is carried in an RRC message) to inform the UE that the CHO is cancelled and the UE deletes the configuration in the previous CHO switching command.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, and the first information in the second message is carried in the short message field.
- the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
- step 12 CU1 broadcasts DCI encrypted with P-RNTI to UE via DU3a, indicating group CHO execution in the short message field.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send the short message field, which is used to indicate the time domain position of PO.
- the UE receives the short message field carried in the DCI from CU1 through the IAB node.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, in which the first information is carried in the PO.
- the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node.
- CU1 broadcasts DCI encrypted with P-RNTI to UE via DU3a in step 13, indicating system information update in the short message field, and then CU1 instructs group CHO execution in the updated system message in step 14.
- the broadcast scheme enables all UEs under DU3a to receive the message, and the reserved bit of the short message field can be used to indicate the execution of group CHO, or after the UE receives the system message update through paging, the group CHO execution can be indicated in the new system message.
- MT3 may have reached the switching condition, but the execution order of MT3 switching and steps 12-14 is not limited here.
- the UE needs to be switched before MT3 switching, but the implementation scenario is not limited to the three processes of full nested/gradual bottom-up/gradual top-down.
- DU3b and CU2 establish a cross-topology F1 interface - MT3 switching - DU3a and CU1 establish a cross-topology F1 interface, and the F1 interface between DU3b and CU2 migrates from cross-topology to same topology.
- MT3 may switch first and then instruct UE to perform CHO.
- steps 11-12 may be before MT3 switching or after MT3 switching, as long as the F1 connection between DU3a and CU1 and the F1 connection between DU3b and CU2 exist.
- the network side triggers CHO execution in the form of broadcast, because if CHO execution is instructed in the form of unicast at this time, CHO may have a small gain.
- the source of CHO gain is the advance configuration of UE, and the UE directly executes when it determines that switching is required.
- the network side uses broadcast to send the CHO execution instruction message to multiple UEs at one time to obtain more gain.
- a cell handover is performed between the UE and the IAB node.
- the UE initiates random access to the target cell under DU3b. If step 7 (2) exists, the UE directly accesses the designated target cell, otherwise the UE selects the target cell to access based on the measurement results of the cells under DU3b.
- this embodiment provides a situation where the F1-C interface of DU3b is issued before the CHO configuration of the UE (applicable to the full nested and gradual bottom-up processes of full migration).
- DU3b is ready, and the cell under DU3b can be configured as a potential target cell of the UE in the CHO switching command.
- the network side sends a broadcast message to the UE to trigger the CHO execution, which reduces the execution time of the full migration process.
- this embodiment solves the problem that in the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB scenario, the UE cannot judge the CHO execution by itself because there is no relative motion between the UE and the vehicle-mounted IAB node, and enables the execution of UE CHO during the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB migration.
- FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application.
- the method includes the following steps.
- CU1 sends a handover request message to CU2. Accordingly, CU2 receives the handover request message from CU1 in this step.
- step 1 CU1 sends a handover request (HO REQUEST) message about UE CHO to CU2, in which the target cell identifier under DU3b corresponds to the target cell that has not been activated. Since DU3b and DU3a belong to the same entity DU, the identifier of the cell to be activated under DU3b may be pre-configured, and IAB-node3 may inform CU1 of it (the signaling of informing CU1 of the identifier of the cell to be activated under DU3b is protected by other patents). Therefore, CU1 may carry the identifier of the target cell that has not been activated in the HO REQUEST and inform CU2 that the target cell is not activated.
- HO REQUEST handover request
- step 2 CU2 performs admission control, but does not perform UE context configuration for DU3b because the F1 interface with DU3b has not been established.
- CU2 sends a handover response message to CU1.
- CU1 receives a handover response message from CU2 in this step.
- CU1 sends a first message to the UE through the IAB node.
- the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
- step 4 it is substantially the same as step 7 in the embodiment shown in Fig. 7.
- the target cell corresponding to the target cell identifier is not yet activated.
- the MT in the IAB node performs the handover.
- the DU in the IAB node establishes an F1 connection with CU2.
- step 6 an F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU2 under the topology of CU2. After the F1 interface of DU3b is established, CU2 configures the UE context to DU3b according to the UE context obtained in step 1.
- CU2 sends third indication information to CU1.
- CU1 receives the third indication information from CU2 in this step.
- step 7 after CU2 completes configuring the UE context to DU3b, it sends third indication information to inform CU1 that the CHO of the UE can be executed.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, and the first information in the second message is carried in the short message field.
- the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send the short message field, which is used to indicate the time domain position of the PO.
- the UE receives the short message field carried on the DCI from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
- CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, in which the first information is carried in the PO.
- the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
- steps 8 to 10 may refer to the implementation shown in steps 12 to 14 in the implementation shown in FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 8 can also support the implementation of canceling the switching configuration shown in step 11 of the implementation shown in FIG. 7 , and the implementation process thereof can refer to the aforementioned embodiment.
- the UE detects any broadcast message of the N cells. Accordingly, the N cells send broadcast messages in this step.
- step 11 the UE detects the signal under DU3b, and triggers CHO execution.
- DU3b is activated later and the UE's CHO switching command is issued earlier than the activation of DU3b, it is allowed to perform CHO switching once the UE detects the signal under DU3b.
- a cell handover is performed between the UE and the IAB node.
- the implementation shown in step 12 may refer to the implementation shown in step 15 in the implementation shown in FIG. 7 .
- This embodiment shows the situation that the UE's CHO configuration is sent before the establishment of the F1-C interface of DU3b (applicable to the gradual top-down process of full migration).
- the F1-C interface of DU3b is established almost at the end. If you want to get the gain of CHO, you need to send the UE's CHO switching command before the MT3 switching. At this time, the target cell under DU3b has not been activated, and the real switching preparation process cannot be carried out.
- the network side sends a broadcast message to the UE to trigger the CHO execution, or the UE triggers the CHO execution when it detects the signal of DU3b, which reduces the execution time of the full migration process.
- this embodiment solves the problem that in the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB scenario, the UE cannot judge the CHO execution by itself because there is no relative motion between the UE and the vehicle-mounted IAB node, and enables the execution of UE CHO during the migration of the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- An F1 connection is established between the IAB node and CU1.
- step 1 the F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU1, but in the F1SETUP RESPONSE message sent by CU1 to DU3b.
- the cells under DU3b do not need to be activated, because the F1 interface established between DU3b and CU1 is only for receiving the underlying configuration information of per UE from CU1, and is not really ready to accept the UE switching to DU3b. If the subsequent steps adopt step 11 in the embodiment shown in Figure 8, the N cells under DU3b should not be activated at this time.
- CU1 requests the IAB node for first configuration information. Accordingly, the IAB node receives the request from CU1 in this step.
- step 2 CU1 configures the UE context to DU3b through F1AP and sends a UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message.
- the IAB node sends the first configuration information to CU1.
- CU1 receives the first configuration information from the IAB node in this step.
- step 3 DU3b generates the underlying configuration information of the UE (i.e., the first configuration information) and sends it to CU1 through the UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message.
- CU1 sends the first configuration information to CU2. Accordingly, CU2 receives the first configuration information from CU1 in this step.
- step 4 CU1 sends the lower-level configuration information of DU3b to CU2. Because CU2 is the CU with which DU3b will eventually establish the F1 interface, the higher-level configuration information (ie, the second configuration information) of the UE under DU3b needs to be generated by CU2.
- CU2 sends the handover configuration information of N cells to CU1.
- CU1 receives the handover configuration information of N cells from CU2 in this step.
- step 5 CU2 combines the bottom layer configuration information of DU3b received in step 4 with the high layer configuration information and sends it to RRC Container Sent to CU1.
- CU1 sends a first message to the UE. Accordingly, the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
- step 6 CU1 sends an RRC reconfiguration message (CHO handover command) to the UE, carrying the complete protocol stack configuration information of the UE in the target cell.
- RRC reconfiguration message CHO handover command
- the MT in the IAB node performs the handover.
- step 8 MT3 switches to the target cell under CU2.
- DU3b in the IAB node establishes an F1 connection with CU2.
- step 9 DU3b re-establishes the F1 interface with CU2 and activates the cell.
- the UE, the IAB node, CU1 and CU2 execute steps 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 8 .
- the source CU sends a HANDOVER REQUEST to the target CU, and then the target CU sends a UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST to the target DU.
- the target DU returns a UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE (carrying the underlying configuration) to the target CU.
- the target CU combines the underlying configuration reported by the DU with the high-level configuration generated by itself, and returns it to the source CU through the RRC Container in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message.
- the source CU then sends an RRC reconfiguration message (handover command) to the UE, transparently transmitting the information in the RRC Container.
- DU3b since DU3b cannot directly establish an F1 interface with CU2, it is proposed to use CU1 as a transfer station so that DU3b reports the underlying configuration to CU1, and then CU1 informs CU2.
- CU1 In the embodiment shown in FIG9 , it is necessary to establish an F1 interface between DU3b and CU1 before MT3 switching, so as to achieve communication between DU3b and CU2 through the F1 interface between DU3b and CU1 and the interface between CU1 and CU2 (such as the XN interface).
- an F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU1.
- CU1 can obtain the complete protocol stack configuration of the UE under DU3b, and then send a CHO switching command to the UE.
- this embodiment solves the problem that the UE cannot be configured with a complete protocol stack under DU3b when DU3b has not established an F1 interface with CU2, so that UE CHO can be performed under the premise of performing the full migration of the IAB node in a gradual top-down manner.
- the configuration information for the DU in the IAB node to communicate needs to be sent down, it is generally necessary to obtain it from the host node through the MT in the IAB node.
- the MT in the IAB node fails to obtain the third configuration information in time (for example, the MT and the first DU are respectively connected to different CUs for communication, or the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), it may cause the DU in the IAB node to fail to communicate normally.
- the following will use Figures 10 and 11 and related embodiments provided by this application to solve this problem.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- the first CU determines third configuration information.
- the first CU determines third configuration information in step S1001, where the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first DU; wherein the first DU is located in an IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and an MT.
- the first CU sends third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the first CU determines the third configuration information in step S1001
- the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node in step S1002, and correspondingly, the IAB node receives the third configuration information in step S1002.
- the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 is carried in an F1 application protocol (F1AP) message, or the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 is carried in an RRC message.
- the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection.
- the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
- the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 includes at least one of the following: a new radio cell global identifier (NCGI), a CU identifier for determining the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish an encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier of a cell in the first DU. (physical cell identifier, PCI).
- NCGI new radio cell global identifier
- CU identifier for determining the NCGI or a first key for the first DU to establish an encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection
- a physical cell identifier of a cell in the first DU physical cell identifier of a cell in the first DU.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of NCGI, PCI, or other configuration information, which is not limited here.
- the method further includes: the first CU receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to indicate that the first CU sends a switching command to the terminal device connected to the second DU, or to indicate that the first DU has sent a third message determined based on the third configuration information.
- the first DU when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU, and the first CU may subsequently schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
- the third message includes a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block (SS/PBCH block) (which may be referred to as SS/PBCH block or SSB for short) sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- SS/PBCH block synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block
- F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the lower-level communication node (such as a terminal device or other IAB node).
- the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the upper-level communication node (such as CU or other IAB nodes), which is not limited here.
- the information that may be included in the third configuration information will be introduced below through some implementation examples.
- NCGI is used to uniquely identify a cell globally and can be carried in the System Information Block 1 (SIB1) message broadcast by the DU and received by the UE.
- SIB1 System Information Block 1
- NCGI is composed of the gNB ID of the F1 anchor CU and the cell ID of the cell under the DU.
- the cell ID of DU3b is pre-configured to IAB-node3. Therefore, when the F1 anchor CU of DU3b is determined, the NCGI of the cell under DU3b after activation can be determined.
- the NCGI will not change. After the introduction of full migration, the NCGI change of the cell under DU3b needs to be considered. This embodiment extends it to the CHO scenario of MT or the scenario where DU and MT migration are decoupled.
- the third configuration information includes PCI.
- PCI is physical cell identifier, which is used to distinguish physical resources of different cells (such as SSB resources).
- the number of PCIs available in NR is 1008, which is much smaller than the number of NR cells in the world, so PCI needs to be reused to a certain extent.
- the PCIs of neighboring cells need to be different.
- the replacement method is to start a new DU (DU3b), use the new PCI, and then switch the UE from DU3a to DU3b.
- the third configuration information includes the first key.
- the security key Kiab
- the security algorithm which requires three input parameters: the IP address of the IAB-DU, the IP address of the donor-CU, and the Key of the donor-CU (KgNB) (the Key of the donor-CU or the security key is the first key).
- the first CU when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is a radio resource control (RRC) connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the first CU can send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information.
- RRC radio resource control
- the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
- the implementation method shown in FIG11 is described below.
- the scenario where the MT in the IAB node is configured with CHO or the scenario where the MT in the IAB node is decoupled from the migration of the DU is considered.
- the core idea of this embodiment is to send the information required by the first DU under the second CU (such as PCI, NCGI, KgNB) in advance.
- the IAB-DU determines the second CU or the IAB-node detects a PCI conflict
- the IAB-DU determines to use the corresponding information under the second CU.
- the first CU and the second CU may be the same.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
- the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the IAB node receives the third configuration information from the first CU in this step.
- step 1 the IAB node is informed in advance of the information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) required by (at least one) first DU under multiple potential second CUs in the RRC message of the MT in the IAB node or the F1AP message of the second DU.
- the RRC message may be a CHO switching command of MT3.
- the PCI information usually does not need to come from another CU, as long as the PCI is a PCI that does not conflict with the neighboring area.
- the specific implementation process of the third configuration information can refer to the description of the embodiment shown in the aforementioned Figure 10, and will not be repeated here.
- the IAB node determines a trigger event, where the trigger event is used to trigger the effectiveness of the third configuration information.
- the first DU in the IAB node determines to take the third configuration information into effect, that is, the first DU in the IAB node executes step 3 and/or step 4.
- the triggering event may include at least one of the following:
- the first DU in the IAB node determines that the CU establishing the F1 interface is the second CU, or the IAB node detects that the cell PCI of the first DU conflicts with the PCI of a nearby cell.
- the PCI of neighboring cells needs to be different.
- the IAB cell and other cells were not originally adjacent, so they may have used the same PCI, but due to mobility, they became neighboring cells, and there would be conflicts.
- the cell under IAB needs to change the PCI.
- the way to change is to start a new DU (such as the first DU), use the new PCI, and then switch the UE from the second DU to the first DU. Therefore, detecting a PCI conflict can also be used as a condition for the configuration under the first DU to take effect.
- the IAB node detects that the cell PCI of the first DU conflicts with the PCI of a nearby cell, which may include any of the following implementation processes, for example: the MT in the IAB node detects the PCI of the neighboring cell through neighboring cell measurement, and finds that it is the same as the cell PCI under the second DU; or the second DU in the IAB node obtains information about the PCI conflict through implementation (such as: the current PCI is available within a preconfigured geographical range, and the second DU finds that it has moved to an area where the current PCI is not available based on the positioning device).
- the MT in the IAB node detects the PCI of the neighboring cell through neighboring cell measurement, and finds that it is the same as the cell PCI under the second DU; or the second DU in the IAB node obtains information about the PCI conflict through implementation (such as: the current PCI is available within a preconfigured geographical range, and the second DU finds that it has moved to an area where the current PC
- the IAB node sends a third message to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the third message from the IAB node in this step.
- the IAB node may send a third message to the terminal device in step 3 based on the configuration information.
- the IAB node sends a third message to the second CU. Accordingly, CU2 receives the third message from the IAB node in this step.
- the IAB node may send a third message to the second CU in step 3 based on the configuration information.
- the IAB node sends indication information to the first CU.
- the first CU receives indication information from the IAB node in this step.
- Step 5 is an optional step.
- the IAB node determines that the third configuration information is effective, the IAB node will send an indication message to the first CU (which can be carried by the RRC message of the MT or the F1AP message of the second DU or the F1AP message of the first DU, wherein the method of using the F1AP of DU3b is only applicable to the scenario where the F1 anchor CU of DU3b and DU3a is the same, that is, the scenario where the PCI is changed above), indicating that the configuration of DU3b has taken effect, or indicating that the UE can be switched to the first DU.
- the third configuration information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) required by the first DU is sent in advance.
- the first DU of the IAB node determines to use the corresponding information under the target CU.
- this embodiment can allow the first DU to correctly obtain the required configuration information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) in these two scenarios.
- the communication device 1200 includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202.
- the communication device 1200 can implement the functions of the communication device (including terminal equipment, source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.) in the above method embodiment, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1200 can be a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.), or it can be a terminal device An integrated circuit or component, such as a chip, inside a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.).
- the following embodiments are described by taking the communication device 1200 as a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.) as an example.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive a first message, the first message including switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the processing unit 1201 is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the transceiver unit 1202 receives the second message.
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information DCI of a physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by a paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI; information in a paging opportunity PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
- the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on the second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the value of N is 1.
- the handover configuration information is conditional handover CHO configuration information.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer; the processing unit 1201 is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that a second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
- the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
- the handover configuration information is conditional handover CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the source CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the first message to the terminal device through an access backhaul integrated IAB node.
- the target DU is located at the IAB node.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU after the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is further configured to send the second message to the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit 1202 sends the second message to the terminal device when at least one of the following is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the processing unit 1201 determines that the mobile terminal MT in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or, the processing unit 1201 determines that receiving an indication from the target CU allows the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the transceiver unit 1202 sends the first message when any of the following items is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 sends a first switching request message to the target CU, it receives a first switching response message from the target CU, and the first switching response message includes switching configuration information of N cells; the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 sends a second switching request message to the target CU, it receives a second switching response message from the target CU, and the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; or, the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- the determining unit is specifically configured to determine the target DU based on the third indication information from the target CU.
- An F1 connection has been established with the target centralized unit CU, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information DCI of a physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by a paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI; information in a paging opportunity PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
- the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on the second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
- the second message is a broadcast message.
- the value of N is 1.
- the method further includes: sending indication information indicating cancellation of the cell handover process corresponding to the handover configuration information.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the target CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is specifically used to send the third indication information to the source CU after the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive a second switching request message from a source centralized unit CU, wherein the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a second switching response message to the source CU, wherein the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is further used to send switching configuration information of N cells to the source centralized unit CU after receiving the first configuration information from the source CU, where the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information
- the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the first CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at an access and backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
- NCGI new wireless cell global identifier
- the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU.
- the device when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the IAB node in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a third message.
- the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
- the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, which is used to identify The CU identifier of the specified NCGI is used for the first DU to establish a first key for encrypted communication of the F1 connection with other CUs, or the physical cell identifier PCI of the cell in the first DU.
- NCGI new wireless cell global identifier
- the transceiver unit 1202 sends a third message when at least one of the following items is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that the cell switching execution condition is met, and the target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU; the processing unit 1201 determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or the processing unit 1201 determines that the PCI of any cell under the first DU conflicts with other PCIs.
- the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send fourth indication information to the first CU, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the first DU.
- the third message includes an SSB sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
- Fig. 13 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1300 provided in the present application.
- the communication device 1300 at least includes an input and output interface 1302.
- the communication device 1300 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
- the communication device also includes a logic circuit 1301.
- the transceiver unit 1202 shown in Figure 12 may be a communication interface, which may be the input/output interface 1302 in Figure 13, which may include an input interface and an output interface.
- the communication interface may also be a transceiver circuit, which may include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
- the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive a first message, the first message including switching configuration information of N cells, N being a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; and the logic circuit 1301 is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the input-output interface 1302 receives the second message.
- the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive a first message, which includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer; the logic circuit 1301 is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that a second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
- the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a first message, which includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the input-output interface 1302 is used to send the first message to the terminal device through an access backhaul integrated IAB node.
- the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; and the input-output interface 1302 is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
- the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine the third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at the access and backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the input and output interface 1302 is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
- the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the input-output interface 1302 is also used to send a third message.
- the logic circuit 1301 and the input/output interface 1302 can also execute other steps executed by the network device in any embodiment and implement The corresponding beneficial effects are now omitted here.
- the processing unit 1201 shown in FIG. 12 may be the logic circuit 1301 in FIG. 13 .
- the logic circuit 1301 may be a processing device, and the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.
- the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.
- the processing device may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform corresponding processing and/or steps in any one of the method embodiments.
- the processing device may include only a processor.
- a memory for storing a computer program is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via a circuit/wire to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory.
- the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be physically independent of each other.
- the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits.
- the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), system on chip (SoC), central processor unit (CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller unit (MCU), programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.
- FPGA field-programmable gate arrays
- ASIC application specific integrated circuits
- SoC system on chip
- CPU central processor unit
- NP network processor
- DSP digital signal processor
- MCU microcontroller unit
- PLD programmable logic device
- FIG. 14 shows a communication device 1400 involved in the above embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 1400 may specifically be a communication device as a terminal device in the above embodiments.
- the communication device 1400 may include but is not limited to at least one processor 1401 and a communication port 1402 .
- the device may also include at least one of a memory 1403 and a bus 1404 .
- the at least one processor 1401 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1400 .
- the processor 1401 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a transistor logic device, a hardware component or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
- the processor can also be a combination that implements a computing function, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like.
- the communication device 1400 shown in Figure 14 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device.
- the specific implementation methods of the communication device shown in Figure 14 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device 1500 involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of the present application.
- the communication device 1500 may specifically be a communication device as a network device (e.g., source CU, target CU, first CU, IAB node, etc.) in the above embodiments.
- the structure of the communication device may refer to the structure shown in FIG. 15.
- the communication device 1500 includes at least one processor 1511 and at least one network interface 1514. Further optionally, the communication device also includes at least one memory 1512, at least one transceiver 1513 and one or more antennas 1515.
- the processor 1511, the memory 1512, the transceiver 1513 and the network interface 1514 are connected, for example, through a bus. In an embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines or buses, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment.
- the antenna 1515 is connected to the transceiver 1513.
- the network interface 1514 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link.
- the network interface 1514 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (such as other network devices or core network devices), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
- the processor 1511 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiment.
- the communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
- the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data
- the central processing unit is mainly used to
- the processor 1511 in FIG. 15 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processor. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the baseband processor and the central processor can also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as buses.
- the terminal device can include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device can include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities.
- the various components of the terminal device can be connected through various buses.
- the baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
- the central processor can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
- the function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data can be built into the processor, or it can be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
- the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
- the memory 1512 can be independent and connected to the processor 1511.
- the memory 1512 can be integrated with the processor 1511, for example, integrated into a chip.
- the memory 1512 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1511.
- the various types of computer program codes executed can also be regarded as drivers of the processor 1511.
- FIG15 shows only one memory and one processor.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc.
- the memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- the transceiver 1513 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1513 can be connected to the antenna 1515.
- the transceiver 1513 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
- one or more antennas 1515 can receive radio frequency signals
- the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1513 is used to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, and convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and provide the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to the processor 1511, so that the processor 1511 further processes the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing.
- the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1513 is also used to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1511, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and send the radio frequency signal through one or more antennas 1515.
- the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the RF signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and the order of the down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable.
- the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a RF signal, and the order of the up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing is adjustable.
- the digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal can be collectively referred to as a digital signal.
- the transceiver 1513 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
- a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit
- a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit
- the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc.
- the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
- the communication device 1500 shown in Figure 15 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the network equipment in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network equipment.
- the specific implementation methods of the communication device 1500 shown in Figure 15 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here one by one.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more computer-executable instructions.
- the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation manner of the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more computer-executable instructions.
- the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation method of the network device (e.g., source CU, target CU, first CU, IAB node, etc.) in the aforementioned embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product (or computer program) storing one or more computers.
- the processor executes the method of the possible implementation mode of the above-mentioned terminal device.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product storing one or more computers.
- the processor executes a method of possible implementation of the above-mentioned network device (such as a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.).
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation of the above communication device.
- the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor.
- the chip system may also include a memory, The memory is used to store the necessary program instructions and data of the communication device.
- the chip system can be composed of a chip, or can include a chip and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device can specifically be the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation methods of the above-mentioned communication device.
- the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.
- the chip system may also include a memory, which is used to store the necessary program instructions and data for the communication device.
- the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be a network device (such as a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.) in the aforementioned method embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments (including at least one of a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.).
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit. If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), a random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), a disk or an optical disk.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Provided in the present application are a communication method and a related device, which are used for reducing overheads for triggering a cell handover process, and improving the execution speed of cell handover, so as to improve the success rate of cell handover. The method comprises: a terminal device receiving a first message, the first message comprising handover configuration information for N cells, N being a positive integer, wherein the handover configuration information is used for a cell handover process, which is triggered on the basis of a second message; and after receiving the second message, the terminal device performing cell handover on the basis of the handover configuration information.
Description
本申请要求于2022年09月27日提交中国国家知识产权局,申请号为202211183378.0,发明名称为“一种通信方法及相关设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on September 27, 2022, with application number 202211183378.0, and invention name “A communication method and related equipment”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关设备。The present application relates to the field of wireless communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and related equipment.
在通信系统中,终端设备接入某个小区之后,通过小区切换的方式,可以对终端设备所接入的小区进行切换。其中,在小区切换执行之前,终端设备接入的小区可以称为源小区,在小区切换执行之后,终端设备接入的小区可以称为目标小区。In a communication system, after a terminal device accesses a cell, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be switched by cell switching. Before the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a source cell, and after the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a target cell.
目前,在小区切换的实现过程中,源小区在检测到与终端设备之间的信号质量恶化之后,可以下发携带目标小区的配置信息的切换消息,使得终端设备接收该消息之后可以基于该目标小区的配置信息接入该目标小区。Currently, during the cell switching process, after the source cell detects that the signal quality between the source cell and the terminal device has deteriorated, it can send a switching message carrying the configuration information of the target cell, so that the terminal device can access the target cell based on the configuration information of the target cell after receiving the message.
然而,上述实现方式中,网络设备需要在检测到信号质量恶化的情况下才会触发向终端设备发送该切换消息,有可能由于该信号质量过差导致该切换消息的传输较慢,影响小区切换的速度甚至造成小区切换失败。However, in the above implementation, the network device needs to trigger the sending of the switching message to the terminal device only when it detects that the signal quality has deteriorated. The transmission of the switching message may be slow due to the poor signal quality, affecting the speed of cell switching or even causing cell switching failure.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关设备,用于节省触发小区切换过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。The present application provides a communication method and related equipment for saving the overhead of triggering a cell switching process and improving the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
本申请第一方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由终端设备执行,或者,该方法由终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第一方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,终端设备接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该终端设备在接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In a first aspect, the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In the first aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by a terminal device. In this method, the terminal device receives a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备接收包括N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,此后,该终端设备在接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。从而,在确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message. Thus, in the case where it is determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to execute cell switching, the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching and is sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
此外,相比于终端设备基于信号质量恶化的测量事件而在本地触发小区切换的实现方式,上述通过第二消息触发执行小区切换的技术方案能够支持更多的小区切换场景,即终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如源小区所在的接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)节点发生跨集中式单元(central unit,CU)迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),仍然能够通过第二消息触发执行小区切换,使得上述技术方案能够获得节省触发过程的开销并提升小区切换的执行速度的增益的情况下,也能够避免在信号质量未发生恶化时,由于终端设备无法在本地触发小区切换而导致小区切换无法执行的情况发生。In addition, compared to the implementation method in which the terminal device triggers cell switching locally based on a measurement event of signal quality deterioration, the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not deteriorated.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:寻呼无线网络临时标识(paging radio network temporary identifier,P-RNTI)加扰的物理下行控制信道(physical download control channel,PDCCH)的下行控制信息(download control information,
DCI)中的短消息(short message)字段;寻呼机会(paging occasion,PO)中的信息;或,N个小区的任一广播信息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items: downlink control information (download control information, The information in the short message field in the DCI; the information in the paging occasion (PO); or any broadcast information of N cells.
基于上述技术方案,第二消息可以通过上述任一项实现,换言之,源小区或N个小区可以通过上述任一项方式触发该终端设备执行小区切换,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the second message can be implemented through any of the above items. In other words, the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
可以理解的是,第一信息承载于short message字段的情况下,第二消息可以为DCI消息;第一信息承载于PO中的信息的情况下,第二消息可以为PO指示系统信息更新的消息;第一信息承载于N个小区的任一广播信息的情况下,第二消息可以为N个小区的任一广播发送的消息。It can be understood that, when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
可选地,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)中的全部PO,或,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的PF中的任一PO。Optionally, all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案,包含有N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息还可以包括上述至少一项指示信息,通过显示携带指示信息的方式指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,和/或,指示在全部PO上监测第二消息,以便于该终端设备基于该显示携带的指示信息明确小区切换的执行。Based on the above technical solution, the first message containing the switching configuration information of N cells may also include at least one of the above-mentioned indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message by displaying the indication information, and/or instructing to monitor the second message on all POs, so that the terminal device can clarify the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the second message is a broadcast message.
基于上述技术方案,第一消息携带的切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,即该第二消息用于触发终端设备执行小区切换过程,从而,该第二消息为广播方式发送的消息(即广播消息)的实现方式能够基于该广播消息的调度触发多个终端设备执行小区切换,以节省开销。并且,能够提升第二消息的下发速度,以期提升多个终端设备基于该广播消息触发执行小区切换的速度。Based on the above technical solution, the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead. In addition, the sending speed of the second message can be increased, so as to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the value of N is 1.
基于上述技术方案,N的取值为1时,第一消息包含有某一个小区的切换配置信息的实现方式能够节省该第一消息的开销的同时,也能够降低终端设备在执行小区切换过程中监测多个小区的信号的开销。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of N is 1, the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message while also reducing the overhead of the terminal device monitoring the signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)配置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the handover configuration information is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information.
可选地,第一消息所包含的切换配置信息为CHO配置信息的情况下,该CHO配置信息对应的触发条件即为基于第二消息触发。此外,CHO配置信息为当前标准/协议中对于基于触发条件触发执行小区切换的切换配置信息的名称,在未来的标准/协议中,CHO配置信息还有可能为其它的名称,此处不做限定。Optionally, when the handover configuration information included in the first message is CHO configuration information, the trigger condition corresponding to the CHO configuration information is triggered based on the second message. In addition, CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for triggering the execution of cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol. In future standards/protocols, CHO configuration information may also have other names, which are not limited here.
本申请第二方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由终端设备执行,或者,该方法由终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第二方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,该终端设备接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数;该终端设备在确定(在预设时长内)未接收到第二消息或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息,该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程。The second aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a terminal device, or the method is executed by some components in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the terminal device functions. In the second aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by a terminal device. In this method, the terminal device receives a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer; after determining (within a preset time) that a second message has not been received or determining that an indication message indicating that the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been cancelled is received, the terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information, and the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备在接收包括N个小区的切换配置的第一消息,该终端设备在确定未接收到第二消息(该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程)或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息。相比于终端设备接收携带有目标小区的配置信息的切换消息时触发小区切换的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且能够基于网络设备的调度(例如网络设备不下发第二消息,或网络设备发送指示信息以取消小区切换等)确定忽略或删除该切换配置信息,即该终端设备能够基于网络设备的调度确定不执行小区切换,以避免小区切换失败。Based on the above technical solution, when a terminal device receives a first message including a switching configuration of N cells, the terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information after determining that a second message (the second message is used to trigger a cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) has not been received or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been received. Compared with the implementation method in which a cell switching is triggered when a terminal device receives a switching message carrying configuration information of a target cell, the terminal device can obtain in advance the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered based on the second message, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the network device (for example, the network device does not send the second message, or the network device sends an indication message to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid cell switching failure.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,或,该切换配置信息为基于测量事件触发的CHO配置信息。
In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the handover configuration information is used for a cell handover process triggered by a second message, or the handover configuration information is CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
基于上述技术方案,第一消息携带的N个小区的配置信息可以通过上述多种方式实现,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the configuration information of N cells carried by the first message can be implemented through the above-mentioned multiple methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
本申请第三方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由源CU执行,或者,该方法由源CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分源CU功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第三方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由源CU执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,源CU确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;其中,N个小区位于目标集中式单元(distributed unit,DU);源CU通过IAB节点向终端设备发送该第一消息。The third aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a source CU, or the method is executed by some components in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions. In the third aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by the source CU. In the method, the source CU determines a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in a target distributed unit (DU); the source CU sends the first message to the terminal device through an IAB node.
基于上述技术方案,源CU通过IAB节点向终端设备发送的第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,且该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且后续可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the above technical solution, the first message sent by the source CU to the terminal device through the IAB node includes the switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can subsequently trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该目标DU位于该IAB节点。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the target DU is located in the IAB node.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备所连接的IAB节点包括源小区所在的源DU,该目标小区所在的目标DU位于该源DU所在的IAB节点的情况下,使得该方案能够应用于终端设备在同一IAB节点中不同DU之间执行小区切换的场景(或者说IAB节点发生跨CU迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的场景)。Based on the above technical solution, the IAB node to which the terminal device is connected includes a source DU where the source cell is located, and the target DU where the target cell is located is located at the IAB node where the source DU is located. This enables the solution to be applied to scenarios where the terminal device performs cell switching between different DUs in the same IAB node (or scenarios where the IAB node migrates across CUs and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled).
可选地,在目标DU位于该IAB节点的情况下,终端设备与该IAB节点之间可以为直连链路(即两者之间不存在其它IAB节点),或者,终端设备与该IAB节点之间还可以为非直连链路(即两者之间还可能存在其它IAB节点),此处不做限定。Optionally, when the target DU is located at the IAB node, the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a direct link (i.e., there is no other IAB node between the two), or the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a non-direct link (i.e., there may be other IAB nodes between the two), which is not limited here.
可选地,目标DU也可以位于其它IAB节点。Optionally, the target DU may also be located at other IAB nodes.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:源CU在确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接之后,向该目标CU发送该终端的切换请求消息;源CU接收来自该目标CU的切换响应消息,该切换响应消息包括该切换配置信息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the method further includes: after the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU sends a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU; the source CU receives a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,源CU在确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接之后,源CU确定目标DU下的小区能够作为潜在的目标小区,为此,该源CU可以与目标CU之间通过切换请求消息与切换响应消息的交互方式获取该切换配置信息,以便于后续该源CU向终端设备发送包含有该切换配置信息的第一消息。Based on the above technical solution, after the source CU determines that the target DU and the target CU have established an F1 connection, the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU can be used as a potential target cell. To this end, the source CU can obtain the switching configuration information through the interaction of switching request messages and switching response messages with the target CU, so that the source CU can subsequently send a first message containing the switching configuration information to the terminal device.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:源CU向该终端设备发送该第二消息。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: the source CU sending the second message to the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案,源CU还可以向该终端设备发送该第二消息,使得该终端设备基于该第二消息触发执行小区切换。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。从而,在确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the above technical solution, the source CU can also send the second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of cell switching based on the second message. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message. Thus, in the case of determining that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to execute cell switching, the second message sent to the terminal device to trigger the execution of cell switching does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
此外,相比于终端设备基于信号质量恶化的测量事件而在本地触发小区切换的实现方式,上述通过第二消息触发执行小区切换的技术方案能够支持更多的小区切换场景,即终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如源小区所在的IAB节点发生跨CU迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),仍然能够通过第二消息触发执行小区切换,使得上述技术方案能够获得节省触发过程的开销并提升小区切换的执行速度的增益的情况下,也能够避免在信号质量未发生恶化时,由于终端设备无法在本地触发小区切换而导致小区切换无法执行的情况发生。In addition, compared to the implementation method in which the terminal device triggers cell switching locally based on a measurement event of signal quality deterioration, the above-mentioned technical solution of triggering cell switching by a second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is going to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not deteriorated.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,源CU向该终端设备发送该第二消息,包括:源CU确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接;源CU确定该IAB节点中的移动终端(mobile termination,MT)将要切换至该目标CU;或,源CU接收来自该目标CU的指示允许该终端设备基于该
切换配置信息执行小区切换。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when at least one of the following is met, the source CU sends the second message to the terminal device, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the source CU determines that the mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or the source CU receives an indication from the target CU allowing the terminal device to establish an F1 connection based on the target CU. The switching configuration information performs cell switching.
基于上述技术方案,在满足上述至少一项时,源CU确定终端设备当前能够执行小区切换并成功切换至该目标DU下的N个小区,为此,该源CU可以向终端设备发送第二消息,使得该终端设备基于接收的第二消息触发执行小区切换。Based on the above technical solution, when at least one of the above items is met, the source CU determines that the terminal device is currently capable of performing cell switching and successfully switching to the N cells under the target DU. To this end, the source CU can send a second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of cell switching based on the received second message.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下任一项时,源CU发送该第一消息,包括:源CU向该目标CU发送第一切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第一切换响应消息,该第一切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息;源CU向该目标CU发送第二切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第二切换响应消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;或,源CU接收来自该目标DU的第一配置信息并向该目标CU发送该第一配置信息之后,接收来自该目标CU的N个小区的切换配置信息,且该N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the source CU sends the first message when any of the following items is met, including: after the source CU sends a first switching request message to the target CU, it receives a first switching response message from the target CU, and the first switching response message includes switching configuration information of N cells; after the source CU sends a second switching request message to the target CU, it receives a second switching response message from the target CU, and the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; or, after the source CU receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,在满足上述至少一项时,源CU确定目标DU下的小区将会作为潜在的目标小区,为此,该源CU可以向终端设备发送包含有N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息,使得在满足切换条件之前下发N个小区的切换配置信息,以便于后续确定需要调度终端设备切换至该N个小区并下发调度消息的情况下,能够节省该调度消息的信令消耗,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the above technical solution, when at least one of the above items is met, the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU will be used as a potential target cell. To this end, the source CU can send a first message containing switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device, so that the switching configuration information of N cells is sent before the switching conditions are met, so that when it is subsequently determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to switch to the N cells and the scheduling message is sent, the signaling consumption of the scheduling message can be saved, so as to improve the success rate of cell switching.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层配置信息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the first configuration information includes radio link control (RLC) layer configuration information and/or media access control (MAC) layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,在目标DU与目标CU之间尚未建立F1连接的情况下,目标DU可以通过源CU向目标CU发送该第一配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC层配置信息),使得目标CU基于该第一配置信息确定该目标DU下的N个小区的切换配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC配置信息,以及PDCP和/或SDAP配置信息),并且目标CU能够通过源CU以第一消息的方式向终端设备发送该N个小区的切换配置信息。Based on the above technical solution, when an F1 connection has not been established between the target DU and the target CU, the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
可选地,目标CU向源CU发送的N个小区的切换配置信息可以承载于切换响应消息(例如前文的第一切换响应消息或第二切换响应消息等),或者其它消息。Optionally, the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该源CU确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接包括:源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the source CU determines that the target DU and the target CU have established an F1 connection, including: the source CU determines that the target DU and the target CU have established an F1 connection based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,源CU可以通过目标CU所发送的第三指示信息确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接,并进一步确定终端设备能够基于切换配置信息成功执行小区切换切换至目标DU。Based on the above technical solution, the source CU can determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU through the third indication information sent by the target CU, and further determine that the terminal device can successfully perform cell switching to the target DU based on the switching configuration information.
可选地,第三指示信息还可以通过其它方式实现,例如,该第三指示信息指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换;又如,该第三指示信息指示(允许)源CU向终端设备发送N个小区的切换配置信息;又如,第三指示信息指示目标DU中的N个小区已激活。Optionally, the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:P-RNTI加扰的PDCCH的DCI中的short message字段;PO中的信息;或,N个小区的任一广播信息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the DCI of the PDCCH encrypted by P-RNTI; information in the PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
基于上述技术方案,第二消息可以通过上述任一项实现,换言之,源小区或N个小区可以通过上述任一项方式触发该终端设备执行小区切换,以提升方案实现的灵活性。Based on the above technical solution, the second message can be implemented through any of the above items. In other words, the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching through any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
可以理解的是,第一信息承载于short message字段的情况下,第二消息可以为DCI消息;第一信息承载于PO中的信息的情况下,第二消息可以为PO指示系统信息更新的消息;第一信息承载于N个小区的任一广播信息的情况下,第二消息可以为N个小区的任一广播发送的消息。It can be understood that, when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
可选地,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)中的全部PO,或,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的PF中的任一PO。Optionally, all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案,包含有N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息还可以包括上述至少一项指示信息,
通过显示携带指示信息的方式指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,和/或,指示在全部PO上监测第二消息,以便于该终端设备基于该显示携带的指示信息明确小区切换的执行。Based on the above technical solution, the first message including the switching configuration information of N cells may also include the above at least one indication information. The switching configuration information is indicated by displaying the indication information to be used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, and/or, the second message is indicated to be monitored on all POs, so that the terminal device can clearly determine the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the second message is a broadcast message.
基于上述技术方案,第一消息携带的切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,即该第二消息用于触发终端设备执行小区切换过程,从而,该第二消息为广播方式发送的消息(即广播消息)的实现方式能够基于该广播消息的调度触发多个终端设备执行小区切换,以节省开销。并且,能够提升第二消息的下发速度,以期提升多个终端设备基于该广播消息触发执行小区切换的速度。Based on the above technical solution, the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead. In addition, the sending speed of the second message can be increased, so as to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the value of N is 1.
基于上述技术方案,N的取值为1时,第一消息包含有某一个小区的切换配置信息的实现方式能够节省该第一消息的开销的同时,也能够降低终端设备在执行小区切换过程中监测多个小区的信号的开销。Based on the above technical solution, when the value of N is 1, the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message while also reducing the overhead of the terminal device monitoring the signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)配置信息。In a possible implementation of the third aspect, the handover configuration information is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information.
可选地,第一消息所包含的切换配置信息为CHO配置信息的情况下,该CHO配置信息对应的触发条件即为基于第二消息触发。此外,CHO配置信息为当前标准/协议中对于基于触发条件触发执行小区切换的切换配置信息的名称,在未来的标准/协议中,CHO配置信息还有可能为其它的名称,此处不做限定。Optionally, when the handover configuration information included in the first message is CHO configuration information, the trigger condition corresponding to the CHO configuration information is triggered based on the second message. In addition, CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for triggering the execution of cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol. In future standards/protocols, CHO configuration information may also have other names, which are not limited here.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:源CU向终端设备发送指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: the source CU sends indication information to the terminal device indicating that the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is cancelled.
可选地,源CU还可以通过其它方式隐式指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消,例如该源CU(在预设时长内)不发送该第二消息。Optionally, the source CU may also implicitly indicate cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information in other ways, for example, the source CU does not send the second message (within a preset time period).
基于上述技术方案,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且能够基于源CU的调度(例如源CU不下发第二消息,或源CU发送指示信息以取消小区切换等)确定忽略或删除该切换配置信息,即该终端设备能够基于网络设备的调度确定不执行小区切换,以避免小区切换失败。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can obtain in advance the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the source CU (for example, the source CU does not send the second message, or the source CU sends an indication information to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid cell switching failure.
本申请第四方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由目标CU执行,或者,该方法由目标CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分目标CU功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第四方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由目标CU执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,目标CU在确定与目标DU已建立F1连接之后,确定第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,该目标DU包括N个小区,N为正整数;其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。The fourth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a target CU, or the method is executed by some components in the target CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the target CU functions. In the fourth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by the target CU. In this method, after determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target DU, the target CU determines third indication information, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU.
基于上述技术方案,目标CU在确定与目标DU已建立F1连接之后,该目标CU可以确定终端设备能够基于小区切换过程切换至该目标DU所包含的N个小区,为此,该目标CU向源CU发送指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换的第三指示信息,以便于该源CU基于该第三指示信息确定能够触发该终端设备执行小区切换。其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,使得终端设备后续可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,以期提升小区切换成功率。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,在源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the above technical solution, after the target CU determines that an F1 connection has been established with the target DU, the target CU can determine that the terminal device can switch to the N cells contained in the target DU based on the cell switching process. To this end, the target CU sends a third indication information to the source CU indicating that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, so that the source CU can determine that the terminal device can be triggered to perform cell switching based on the third indication information. Among them, the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, so that the terminal device can subsequently trigger the cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, when the source CU determines that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU, the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, in order to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
此外,相比于终端设备基于信号质量恶化的测量事件而在本地触发小区切换的实现方式,上述通过第二消息触发执行小区切换的技术方案能够支持更多的小区切换场景,即终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如源小区所在的IAB节点发生跨CU迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),仍然能够通过第二消息触发执行小区切换,使得上述技术方案能够获得节省触发过程的开销并提升小区切换的执行速度的增益的情况下,也能够避免在信号质量未发生恶化时,由于终端设备无法在本地触发小区切换而导致小区切换无法执行
的情况发生。In addition, compared to the implementation method in which the terminal device triggers cell switching locally based on a measurement event of signal quality deterioration, the above-mentioned technical solution of triggering cell switching by a second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is going to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can obtain the gain of saving the overhead of the triggering process and improving the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not deteriorated. situation occurs.
可选地,第三指示信息还可以通过其它方式实现,例如,该第三指示信息指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换;又如,该第三指示信息指示(允许)源CU向终端设备发送N个小区的切换配置信息;又如,第三指示信息指示目标DU中的N个小区已激活。Optionally, the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息包括:目标CU在确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the target CU sending the third indication information to the source CU includes: after the target CU determines that the target DU has configured the context of the terminal device, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU.
基于上述技术方案,目标CU在确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,该目标CU可以确定终端设备能够通过该目标DU所包含的N个小区接入网络,为此没改目标CU可以向源CU发送该第三指示信息,以便于源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息调度终端设备执行小区切换。Based on the above technical solution, after the target CU determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device, the target CU can determine that the terminal device can access the network through the N cells contained in the target DU. To this end, the target CU can send the third indication information to the source CU, so that the source CU schedules the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该方法还包括:目标CU接收来自源集中式单元CU的第二切换请求消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;其中,N个小区位于该目标DU;目标CU向该源CU发送第二切换响应消息,该第二切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息。In a possible implementation of the fourth aspect, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: the target CU receives a second switching request message from the source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the target CU sends a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells.
基于上述技术方案,在目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该目标CU和源CU之间可以通过第二切换请求消息和第二切换响应消息的交互,使得目标CU基于未激活的N个小区确定相应的切换配置信息之后,通过源CU向终端设备发送该切换配置信息,以便于终端设备后续能够基于第二消息的触发执行该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程。Based on the above technical solution, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the target CU and the source CU can interact through the second switching request message and the second switching response message, so that the target CU determines the corresponding switching configuration information based on the N unactivated cells, and then sends the switching configuration information to the terminal device through the source CU, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该方法还包括:目标CU接收来自源集中式单元CU的该第一配置信息之后,向该源CU发送N个小区的切换配置信息,N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。In a possible implementation of the fourth aspect, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: after the target CU receives the first configuration information from the source centralized unit CU, sending switching configuration information of N cells to the source CU, the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
可选地,该第一配置信息包括RLC层配置信息和/或MAC层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括PDCP层配置信息和/或SDAP层配置信息。Optionally, the first configuration information includes RLC layer configuration information and/or MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes PDCP layer configuration information and/or SDAP layer configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,在目标DU与目标CU之间尚未建立F1连接的情况下,目标DU可以通过源CU向目标CU发送该第一配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC层配置信息),使得目标CU基于该第一配置信息确定该目标DU下的N个小区的切换配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC配置信息,以及PDCP和/或SDAP配置信息),并且目标CU能够通过源CU以第一消息的方式向终端设备发送该N个小区的切换配置信息,以便于终端设备后续能够基于第二消息的触发执行该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程。Based on the above technical solution, when an F1 connection has not been established between the target DU and the target CU, the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
可选地,目标CU向源CU发送的N个小区的切换配置信息可以承载于切换响应消息(例如前文的第一切换响应消息或第二切换响应消息等),或者其它消息。Optionally, the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
本申请第五方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由第一CU执行,或者,该方法由第一CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分第一CU功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第五方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由第一CU执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,第一CU确定第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括第一DU的第三配置信息;其中,该第一DU位于IAB节点,该IAB节点还包括第二DU和MT;第一CU向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息。The fifth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, which is executed by a first CU, or the method is executed by some components in the first CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first CU. In the fifth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by the first CU. In the method, the first CU determines third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first DU; wherein the first DU is located at an IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and an MT; the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node.
基于上述技术方案,第一CU与IAB节点存在通信连接的情况下(例如第一CU与IAB节点中的MT存在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接和/或第一CU与IAB节点中的第二DU存在F1连接的情况下),第一CU可以向该IAB节点发送第一DU(即除了第二DU之外的其他DU)的第三配置信息,使得第一DU能够基于该第三配置信息进行通信。其中,IAB节点中的MT无需再次通过RRC连接接收来自该第一CU的配置信息,即可使得IAB节点中的第一DU能够获取该第三配置信息并基于该第三配置信息进行通信。从而,在IAB节点中的MT无法及时从第一CU获取配置信息的情况下(例如MT和第一DU分别连接至不同的CU进行通信的情况,又如MT和第一DU均切换至同一CU但是MT的切换时机晚于第一DU的切换时机的情况等),能够使能第一DU基于该第三配置信息进行通信,以避免该第一DU由于缺少该第三配置信息而导致无法通信的情况出现。Based on the above technical solution, when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is a radio resource control (RRC) connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the first CU can send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information. Among them, the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case that the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case that the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case that the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation that the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1应用协议(F1application
protocol,F1AP)消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the third configuration information is carried in an F1 application protocol (F1application protocol, F1AP) message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
基于上述技术方案,第一CU可以通过多种方式向该IAB节点下发第三配置信息。其中,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中第二DU与第一CU之间的F1连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该F1连接上的F1AP消息。或者,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中MT与第一CU之间的RRC连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该RRC连接上的RRC消息。Based on the above technical solution, the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways. Among them, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection. Alternatively, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识(new radio cell global identifier,NCGI),用于确定NCGI的CU标识,或,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识(physical cell identifier,PCI)。In a possible implementation of the fifth aspect, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new radio cell global identifier (NCGI), a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier (PCI) of a cell in the first DU.
可选地,第一CU向IAB节点发送的第三配置信息可以包括该第一DU与其他通信节点(例如CU或者其它的IAB节点或者终端设备等)的配置信息,该配置信息可以包括上述NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,PCI,或者是其他的配置信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, the third configuration information sent by the first CU to the IAB node may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of NCGI, PCI, or other configuration information, which is not limited here.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一CU向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息之后,该方法还包括:第一CU接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第二DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令,或用于指示第一DU已发送基于该第三配置信息确定的第三消息。In a possible implementation of the fifth aspect, after the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node, the method also includes: the first CU receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to indicate that the first CU sends a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU, or to indicate that the first DU has sent a third message determined based on the third configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,第一DU在基于该第三配置信息能够进行通信的情况下,该第一DU还可以向第一CU发送指示信息,以使得该第一CU明确该第一DU已生效该第三配置信息,后续该第一CU可以基于该第三配置信息调度该第一DU和/或与该第一DU连接的终端设备。Based on the above technical solution, when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows clearly that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU. Subsequently, the first CU may schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
本申请第六方面提供了一种通信方法,该方法由IAB节点执行,或者,该方法由IAB节点中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行,或者该方法还可以由能实现全部或部分IAB节点功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。在第六方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信方法由IAB节点执行为例进行描述。在该方法中,IAB节点接收第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括该第一DU的第三配置信息;IAB节点发送第三消息,该第三消息为基于该第三配置信息得到。In the sixth aspect of the present application, a communication method is provided, which is executed by an IAB node, or the method is executed by some components in the IAB node (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the method can also be implemented by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the IAB node. In the sixth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication method is described as being executed by an IAB node. In the method, the IAB node receives third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the IAB node sends a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information.
基于上述技术方案,第一CU与IAB节点存在通信连接的情况下(例如第一CU与IAB节点中的MT存在RRC连接和/或第一CU与IAB节点中的第二DU存在F1连接的情况下),该IAB节点接收来自第一CU的第一DU(即除了第二DU之外的其他DU)的第三配置信息,使得第一DU能够发送基于该第三配置信息得到的第三消息。其中,IAB节点中的MT无需再次通过RRC连接接收来自该第一CU的配置信息,即可使得IAB节点中的第一DU能够获取该第三配置信息并基于该第三配置信息进行通信。从而,在IAB节点中的MT无法及时从第一CU获取配置信息的情况下(例如MT和第一DU分别连接至不同的CU进行通信的情况,又如MT和第一DU均切换至同一CU但是MT的切换时机晚于第一DU的切换时机的情况等),能够使能第一DU基于该第三配置信息进行通信,以避免该第一DU由于缺少该第三配置信息而导致无法通信的情况出现。Based on the above technical solution, when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is an RRC connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the IAB node receives the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) from the first CU, so that the first DU can send a third message based on the third configuration information. Among them, the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU through the RRC connection again, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1AP消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
基于上述技术方案,第一CU可以通过多种方式向该IAB节点下发第三配置信息。其中,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中第二DU与第一CU之间的F1连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该F1连接上的F1AP消息。或者,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中MT与第一CU之间的RRC连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该RRC连接上的RRC消息。Based on the above technical solution, the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways. Among them, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection. Alternatively, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识PCI。In a possible implementation of the sixth aspect, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
可选地,第一CU向IAB节点发送的第三配置信息可以包括该第一DU与其它通信节点(例如CU或者其它的IAB节点或者终端设备等)的配置信息,该配置信息可以包括上述NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU
标识,PCI,或者是其他的配置信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, the third configuration information sent by the first CU to the IAB node may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, which is used to determine the CU of NCGI. Identification, PCI, or other configuration information is not limited here.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,该第一DU发送第三消息,包括:该IAB节点的MT确定满足小区切换执行条件,且该小区切换对应的目标小区位于该其它CU;该IAB节点的第一DU确定与该其它CU建立F1连接;或,该IAB节点检测到该第一DU下任一小区的PCI与其它PCI发生冲突。In a possible implementation of the sixth aspect, the first DU sends a third message when at least one of the following items is met, including: the MT of the IAB node determines that the cell switching execution condition is met, and the target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU; the first DU of the IAB node determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or the IAB node detects that the PCI of any cell under the first DU conflicts with other PCIs.
基于上述技术方案,第一DU在确定满足上述至少一项的情况下,该第一DU可以确定可以基于该第三配置信息进行通信,为此,该第一DU可以发送基于该第三配置信息得到的第三消息。Based on the above technical solution, when the first DU determines that at least one of the above items is satisfied, the first DU can determine that communication can be performed based on the third configuration information. To this end, the first DU can send a third message obtained based on the third configuration information.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该第一DU发送第三消息之后,该方法还包括:该第一DU向该第一CU发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第一DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令。In a possible implementation of the sixth aspect, after the first DU sends the third message, the method also includes: the first DU sends fourth indication information to the first CU, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to the terminal device connected to the first DU.
基于上述技术方案,第一DU在基于该第三配置信息能够进行通信的情况下,该第一DU还可以向第一CU发送指示信息,以使得该第一CU明确该第一DU已生效该第三配置信息,后续该第一CU可以基于该第三配置信息调度该第一DU和/或与该第一DU连接的终端设备。Based on the above technical solution, when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows clearly that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU. Subsequently, the first CU may schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三消息包括该第一DU向终端设备发送的同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block,SS/PBCH block)(可以简称为SS/PBCH块或SSB),或,该第一DU向其它CU发送的F1连接建立请求消息。In a possible implementation of the sixth aspect, the third message includes a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block (SS/PBCH block) (which may be referred to as SS/PBCH block or SSB for short) sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
可选地,第三消息除了上述SSB之外,还可以包括该第一DU与下级通信节点(例如终端设备或者其它的IAB节点)的其它消息。Optionally, in addition to the above-mentioned SSB, the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the lower-level communication node (such as a terminal device or other IAB node).
可选地,第三消息除了上述F1连接建立请求消息之外,还可以包括其它该第一DU与上级通信节点(例如CU或者其它的IAB节点)的其它消息,此处不做限定。Optionally, in addition to the above-mentioned F1 connection establishment request message, the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the upper-level communication node (such as CU or other IAB nodes), which is not limited here.
本申请第七方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,或者,该装置为终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第七方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为终端设备执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该收发单元用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该处理单元用于在该收发单元接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In the seventh aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In the seventh aspect and its possible implementation, the communication device is described as an example of execution as a terminal device. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the processing unit is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the transceiver unit receives the second message.
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:In a possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items:
寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;The short message field in the downlink control information DCI of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI;
寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,The information in the pager PO; or,
N个小区的任一广播信息。Any broadcast information of N cells.
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:In a possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the first message further includes at least one of the following:
第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or,
第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。The second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the second message is a broadcast message.
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the value of N is 1.
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为条件切换CHO配置信息。In a possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the switching configuration information is conditional switching CHO configuration information.
本申请实施例第七方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第一方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第一方面,此处不再赘述。In the seventh aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the first aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the first aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请第八方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,或者,该装置为终端设备中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第八方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为终端设备执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该收发单元用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,
N为正整数;该处理单元用于在确定未接收到第二消息(该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程)或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息。In an eighth aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which is a terminal device, or the device is a partial component in the terminal device (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the terminal device. In the eighth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication device is described as an example of execution as a terminal device. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the transceiver unit is used to receive a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer; the processing unit is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that the second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程。In a possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为基于测量事件触发的条件切换CHO配置信息。In a possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the switching configuration information is conditional switching CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
本申请实施例第八方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第二方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第二方面,此处不再赘述。In the eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the second aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the second aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请第九方面提供了一种通信方法,该装置为源CU,或者,该装置为源CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分源CU功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第九方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为源CU执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该处理单元用于确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;其中,N个小区位于目标DU;该收发单元用于通过接入回传一体化IAB节点向终端设备发送该第一消息。The ninth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is a source CU, or the device is a partial component in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions. In the ninth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the communication device is described as an example of execution as a source CU. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit is used to send the first message to the terminal device through the access backhaul integrated IAB node.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该目标DU位于该IAB节点。In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the target DU is located in the IAB node.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于在该处理单元确定该目标DU与目标集中式单元CU已建立F1连接之后,向该目标CU发送该终端的切换请求消息;该收发单元还用于接收来自该目标CU的切换响应消息,该切换响应消息包括该切换配置信息。In a possible implementation of the ninth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to send a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU after the processing unit determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU; the transceiver unit is also used to receive a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于向该终端设备发送该第二消息。In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the transceiver unit is further used to send the second message to the terminal device.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,该收发单元向该终端设备发送该第二消息,包括:In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, when at least one of the following items is met, the transceiver unit sends the second message to the terminal device, including:
该处理单元确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接;The processing unit determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU;
该处理单元确定该IAB节点中的移动终端MT将要切换至该目标CU;或,The processing unit determines that the mobile terminal MT in the IAB node is to be switched to the target CU; or,
该处理单元确定接收来自该目标CU的指示允许该终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。The processing unit determines that receiving an indication from the target CU allows the terminal device to perform a cell switch based on the switching configuration information.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下任一项时,该收发单元发送该第一消息,包括:In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, when any of the following items is met, the transceiver unit sends the first message, including:
该处理单元确定该收发单元向该目标CU发送第一切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第一切换响应消息,该第一切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息;The processing unit determines that after the transceiver unit sends the first handover request message to the target CU, a first handover response message is received from the target CU, where the first handover response message includes handover configuration information of N cells;
该处理单元确定该收发单元向该目标CU发送第二切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第二切换响应消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;或,The processing unit receives a second switching response message from the target CU after determining that the transceiver unit sends a second switching request message to the target CU, wherein the second switching request message includes identifiers of N cells and the N cells are inactivated cells; or,
该处理单元确定该收发单元接收来自该目标DU的第一配置信息并向该目标CU发送该第一配置信息之后,接收来自该目标CU的N个小区的切换配置信息,且该N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。The processing unit determines that after the transceiver unit receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。In a possible implementation of the ninth aspect, the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该确定单元具体用于基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定该目标DU与目标集中式单元CU已建立F1连接,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In a possible implementation of the ninth aspect, the determination unit is specifically used to determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following items:
寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;The short message field in the downlink control information DCI of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI;
寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,The information in the pager PO; or,
N个小区的任一广播信息。Any broadcast information of N cells.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the first message further includes at least one of the following:
第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,
first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or,
第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。The second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the second message is a broadcast message.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the value of N is 1.
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:In a possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the method further includes:
发送指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息。Send indication information indicating cancellation of the cell handover process corresponding to the handover configuration information.
本申请实施例第九方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第三方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第三方面,此处不再赘述。In the ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the third aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the third aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请第十方面提供了一种通信方法,该装置为目标CU,或者,该装置为目标CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分目标CU功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第十方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为目标CU执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该处理单元用于在确定与目标分布式单元DU已建立F1连接之后,确定第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,该目标DU包括N个小区,N为正整数;其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该收发单元用于向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。The tenth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is a target CU, or the device is a partial component in the target CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the target CU functions. In the tenth aspect and its possible implementation, the communication device is described as an example of execution as a target CU. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine a third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with a target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs a cell switch based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on a second message; the transceiver unit is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元具体用于在该处理单元确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the tenth aspect, the transceiver unit is specifically used to send the third indication information to the source CU after the processing unit determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device.
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自源集中式单元CU的第二切换请求消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;其中,N个小区位于该目标DU;该收发单元还用于向该源CU发送第二切换响应消息,该第二切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息。In a possible implementation of the tenth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to receive a second switching request message from a source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message including the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit is also used to send a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message including the switching configuration information of the N cells.
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自源集中式单元CU的该第一配置信息之后,向该源CU发送N个小区的切换配置信息,N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。In a possible implementation of the tenth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to send switching configuration information of N cells to the source centralized unit CU after receiving the first configuration information from the source CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。In a possible implementation of the tenth aspect, the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
本申请实施例第十方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第四方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第四方面,此处不再赘述。In the tenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fourth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the fourth aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请第十一方面提供了一种通信装置,该装置为源CU,或者,该装置为源CU中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分源CU功能的逻辑模块或软件。在第十一方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为源CU执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该处理单元用于确定第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括第一集中式单元DU的第三配置信息;其中,该第一DU位于接入回传一体化IAB节点,该IAB节点还包括第二DU和移动终端MT;该收发单元用于向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息。In the eleventh aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which is a source CU, or the device is a partial component in the source CU (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.), or the device can also be a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the source CU functions. In the eleventh aspect and its possible implementation methods, the communication device is described as an example of execution as a source CU. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is used to determine third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of a first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at an access backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the transceiver unit is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
在第十一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1AP消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner of the eleventh aspect, the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
在第十一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,或,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识PCI。In a possible implementation of the eleventh aspect, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
在第十一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第二DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令。In a possible implementation of the eleventh aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to receive fourth indication information, which is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU.
本申请实施例第十一方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第五方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第五方面,此处不再赘述。In the eleventh aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the fifth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the fifth aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请第十二方面提供了一种通信方法,该装置为IAB节点,或者,该装置为IAB节点中的部分组件(例如处理器、芯片或芯片系统等),或者,该装置还可以为能够实现全部或部分IAB节点功能的逻
辑模块或软件。在第十二方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该通信装置为IAB节点执行为例进行描述。该装置包括收发单元和处理单元;该装置包括处理单元和收发单元,该收发单元用于接收第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括该第一DU的第三配置信息;该处理单元用于确定第三消息,该第三消息为基于该第三配置信息得到;该收发单元还用于发送第三消息。A twelfth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, wherein the device is an IAB node, or the device is a partial component (such as a processor, a chip or a chip system, etc.) in the IAB node, or the device can also be a logic device capable of realizing all or part of the functions of the IAB node. In the twelfth aspect and possible implementations thereof, the communication device is described as an IAB node. The device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit; the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit, the transceiver unit is used to receive third configuration information, the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the processing unit is used to determine a third message, the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the transceiver unit is also used to send a third message.
在第十二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1AP消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect, the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
在第十二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识PCI。In a possible implementation of the twelfth aspect, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, a CU identifier used to determine the NCGI, a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
在第十二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,该收发单元发送第三消息,包括:In a possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect, when at least one of the following items is met, the transceiver unit sends the third message, including:
该处理单元确定满足小区切换执行条件,且该小区切换对应的目标小区位于该其它CU;The processing unit determines that a cell switching execution condition is met, and a target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU;
该处理单元确定确定与该其它CU建立F1连接;或,The processing unit determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or,
该处理单元确定检测到该第一DU下任一小区的PCI与其它PCI发生冲突。The processing unit determines that a PCI of any cell under the first DU is detected to conflict with other PCIs.
在第十二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元还用于向该第一CU发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第一DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令。In a possible implementation of the twelfth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to send fourth indication information to the first CU, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the first DU.
在第十二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第三消息包括该第一DU向终端设备发送的SSB,或,该第一DU向其它CU发送的F1连接建立请求消息。In a possible implementation manner of the twelfth aspect, the third message includes an SSB sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
本申请实施例第十二方面中,通信装置的组成模块还可以用于执行第六方面的各个可能实现方式中所执行的步骤,并实现相应的技术效果,具体均可以参阅第六方面,此处不再赘述。In the twelfth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the constituent modules of the communication device can also be used to execute the steps performed in each possible implementation method of the sixth aspect and achieve corresponding technical effects. For details, please refer to the sixth aspect and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例第十三方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与存储器耦合;该存储器用于存储程序或指令;其中,该至少一个处理器用于执行该程序或指令,以使该装置实现前述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面及其任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A thirteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory; the memory is used to store programs or instructions; wherein the at least one processor is used to execute the program or instructions so that the device implements the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
本申请实施例第十四方面提供了一种通信装置,包括至少一个逻辑电路和输入输出接口;该逻辑电路用于执行如前述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面及其任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A fourteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one logic circuit and an input/output interface; the logic circuit is used to execute the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
本申请实施例第十五方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该存储介质存储有指令,当该指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如上述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面及其任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A fifteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores instructions. When the instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects above and any possible implementation method thereof.
本申请实施例第十六方面提供一种计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码在处理器运行时,使得处理器执行上述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面及其任意一种可能的实现方式所述的方法。A sixteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product (or computer program), which includes a computer program code. When the computer program code is executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects and any possible implementation method thereof.
本申请实施例第十七方面提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面及其任意一种可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。A seventeenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in any one of the first to sixth aspects above and any possible implementation methods thereof.
在一种可能的设计中,该芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该第一通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。In one possible design, the chip system may also include a memory for storing program instructions and data necessary for the first communication device. The chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices. Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor.
本申请实施例第十八方面提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第四方面的通信装置,第五方面的通信装置和第六方面的通信装置中的至少两个。An eighteenth aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, which includes at least two of the communication device of the fourth aspect, the communication device of the fifth aspect, and the communication device of the sixth aspect.
或者,该通信系统包括源CU和终端设备,可选地,该通信系统还包括目标CU。其中,该终端设备用于执行前述第一方面或第二方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的方法,该源CU用于执行前述第三方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的方法,该目标CU用于执行前述第四方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的方法。Alternatively, the communication system includes a source CU and a terminal device, and optionally, the communication system also includes a target CU. The terminal device is used to execute the method in the first aspect or the second aspect and any possible implementation thereof, the source CU is used to execute the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation thereof, and the target CU is used to execute the method in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation thereof.
或者,该通信系统包括第一CU和IAB节点。其中,该第一CU用于执行前述第五方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的方法,该IAB节点用于执行前述第六方面及其任一可能的实现方式中的方法。Alternatively, the communication system includes a first CU and an IAB node, wherein the first CU is used to execute the method in the fifth aspect and any possible implementation thereof, and the IAB node is used to execute the method in the sixth aspect and any possible implementation thereof.
应理解,第七方面至第十八方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面至第六方
面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the technical effects brought about by any one of the design methods in the seventh to eighteenth aspects can be referred to in the first to sixth aspects above. The technical effects brought about by the different design methods in the surface will not be elaborated here.
从以上技术方案可以看出,本申请提供的方案具备以下有益效果:It can be seen from the above technical solutions that the solution provided by this application has the following beneficial effects:
在一些实施例中,终端设备接收包括N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,此后,该终端设备在接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。从而,在确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。In some embodiments, a terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information. Compared to the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message. Thus, in the case where it is determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to execute cell switching, the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching and is sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
此外,相比于终端设备基于信号质量恶化的测量事件而在本地触发小区切换的实现方式,上述通过第二消息触发执行小区切换的技术方案能够支持更多的小区切换场景,即终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如源小区所在的接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)节点发生跨集中式单元(central unit,CU)迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),仍然能够通过第二消息触发执行小区切换,使得上述技术方案能够获得节省触发过程的开销并提升小区切换的执行速度的增益的情况下,也能够避免在信号质量未发生恶化时,由于终端设备无法在本地触发小区切换而导致小区切换无法执行的情况发生。In addition, compared to the implementation method in which the terminal device triggers cell switching locally based on a measurement event of signal quality deterioration, the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not deteriorated.
在一些实施例中,第一CU与IAB节点存在通信连接的情况下(例如第一CU与IAB节点中的MT存在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接和/或第一CU与IAB节点中的第二DU存在F1连接的情况下),第一CU可以向该IAB节点发送第一DU(即除了第二DU之外的其他DU)的第三配置信息,使得第一DU能够基于该第三配置信息进行通信。其中,IAB节点中的MT无需再次通过RRC连接接收来自该第一CU的配置信息,即可使得IAB节点中的第一DU能够获取该第三配置信息并基于该第三配置信息进行通信。从而,在IAB节点中的MT无法及时从第一CU获取配置信息的情况下(例如MT和第一DU分别连接至不同的CU进行通信的情况,又如MT和第一DU均切换至同一CU但是MT的切换时机晚于第一DU的切换时机的情况等),能够使能第一DU基于该第三配置信息进行通信,以避免该第一DU由于缺少该第三配置信息而导致无法通信的情况出现。In some embodiments, when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is a radio resource control (RRC) connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the first CU may send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information. Among them, the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
图1a为本申请提供的通信系统的一个示意图;FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application;
图1b为本申请提供的通信系统的另一个示意图;FIG1b is another schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application;
图2a为IAB节点跨CU迁移的一个示意图;FIG2 a is a schematic diagram of IAB node migration across CUs;
图2b为IAB节点跨CU迁移的另一个示意图;FIG2 b is another schematic diagram of IAB node cross-CU migration;
图3为本申请提供的通信系统的另一个示意图;FIG3 is another schematic diagram of a communication system provided by the present application;
图4为本申请提供的通信方法的一个示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by the present application;
图5为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG5 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图6为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG6 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图7为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG7 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图8为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG8 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图9为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG9 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图10为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG10 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图11为本申请提供的通信方法的另一个示意图;FIG11 is another schematic diagram of the communication method provided by the present application;
图12为本申请提供的通信装置的一个示意图;FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;
图13为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG13 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;
图14为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图;FIG14 is another schematic diagram of a communication device provided by the present application;
图15为本申请提供的通信装置的另一个示意图。
FIG. 15 is another schematic diagram of the communication device provided in the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without creative work are within the scope of protection of this application.
首先,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。First, some terms in the embodiments of the present application are explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
(1)终端设备:可以是能够接收网络设备调度和指示信息的无线终端设备,无线终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,或具有无线连接功能的手持式设备,或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。(1) Terminal device: It can be a wireless terminal device that can receive network device scheduling and instruction information. The wireless terminal device can be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem.
终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网或者互联网进行通信,终端设备可以是移动终端设备,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话,手机(mobile phone))、计算机和数据卡,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语音和/或数据。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为系统、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户站(subscriber station,SS)、用户端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)、终端(terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等。The terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks or the Internet via the radio access network (RAN). The terminal equipment can be a mobile terminal equipment, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone, mobile phone), a computer and a data card. For example, it can be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile device that exchanges voice and/or data with the radio access network. For example, personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDA), tablet computers (Pad), computers with wireless transceiver functions and other devices. Wireless terminal equipment can also be called system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station (MS), remote station, access point (AP), remote terminal equipment (remote terminal), access terminal equipment (access terminal), user terminal equipment (user terminal), user agent (user agent), subscriber station (SS), customer premises equipment (CPE), terminal, user equipment (UE), mobile terminal (MT), etc.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。As an example but not limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc., which are a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design and develop wearable devices for daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also powerful functions achieved through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, etc., as well as those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc.
终端还可以是无人机、机器人、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)中的终端、车辆外联(vehicle to everything,V2X)中的终端、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。The terminal can also be a drone, a robot, a terminal in device-to-device (D2D) communication, a terminal in vehicle to everything (V2X), a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical, a wireless terminal in smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, etc.
此外,终端设备也可以是第五代(5th generation,5G)通信系统之后演进的通信系统(例如第六代(6th generation,6G)通信系统等)中的终端设备或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。示例性的,6G网络可以进一步扩展5G通信终端的形态和功能,6G终端包括但不限于车、蜂窝网络终端(融合卫星终端功能)、无人机、物联网(internet of things,IoT)设备。In addition, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in a communication system that evolves after the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system (e.g., a sixth generation (6th generation, 6G) communication system, etc.) or a terminal device in a future-evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc. Exemplarily, the 6G network can further expand the form and function of the 5G communication terminal, and the 6G terminal includes but is not limited to a car, a cellular network terminal (with integrated satellite terminal function), a drone, and an Internet of Things (IoT) device.
(2)网络设备:可以是无线网络中的设备,例如网络设备可以为将终端设备接入到无线网络的RAN节点(或设备),又可以称为基站。目前,一些RAN设备的举例为:5G通信系统中的基站gNB(gNodeB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved Node B,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)。另外,在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。
(2) Network equipment: It can be equipment in a wireless network. For example, the network equipment can be a RAN node (or device) that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, which can also be called a base station. At present, some examples of RAN equipment are: base station gNB (gNodeB) in a 5G communication system, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), home base station (e.g., home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU). In addition, in a network structure, the network equipment can include a centralized unit (CU) node, a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
网络设备可以是其它为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。本申请的实施例对网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为方便描述,本申请实施例并不限定。The network device may be any other device that provides wireless communication functions for the terminal device. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form used by the network device. For the convenience of description, the embodiments of the present application do not limit.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiment of the present application, the device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or may be a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, which may be installed in the network device. In the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device as an example that the network device is used as the device.
(3)配置与预配置:在本申请中,会同时用到配置与预配置。其中,配置是指网络设备/服务器通过消息或信令将一些参数的配置信息或参数的取值发送给终端,以便终端根据这些取值或信息来确定通信的参数或传输时的资源。预配置与配置类似,可以是网络设备/服务器预先与终端设备协商好的参数信息或参数值,也可以是标准协议规定的基站/网络设备或终端设备采用的参数信息或参数值,还可以是预先存储在基站/服务器或终端设备的参数信息或参数值。本申请对此不做限定。(3) Configuration and pre-configuration: In this application, configuration and pre-configuration are used at the same time. Configuration refers to the network device/server sending some parameter configuration information or parameter values to the terminal through messages or signaling, so that the terminal can determine the communication parameters or resources during transmission based on these values or information. Pre-configuration is similar to configuration, and can be parameter information or parameter values pre-negotiated between the network device/server and the terminal device, or parameter information or parameter values used by the base station/network device or terminal device specified by the standard protocol, or parameter information or parameter values pre-stored in the base station/server or terminal device. This application does not limit this.
进一步地,这些取值和参数,是可以变化或更新的。Furthermore, these values and parameters can be changed or updated.
(4)寻呼(paging),网络设备向终端设备发送的寻呼的作用主要包括两方面,一方面是寻呼(例如对于处于RRC空闲态(RRC_IDLE)和RRC非激活态(RRC_INACTIVE)的终端设备),另一方面是系统消息更新(例如对于处于RRC连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)的终端设备)。(4) Paging: The paging sent by the network device to the terminal device has two main functions: one is paging (for example, for the terminal device in the RRC idle state (RRC_IDLE) and the RRC inactive state (RRC_INACTIVE)), and the other is system message update (for example, for the terminal device in the RRC connected state (RRC_CONNECTED)).
一般地,Paging消息的内容(paging message)是通过物理下行业务信道(physical downlink service channel,PDSCH)资源位置发给终端设备的,而PDSCH资源是通过P-RNTI(其中,P-RNTI全网为一个固定值)加扰PDCCH指示的。也就是说,终端设备要获得Paging消息,首先要周期性地醒来监视P-RNTI加扰的PDCCH信道,然后解析DCI,进一步得到PDSCH信道的时频位置,终端设备在对应的PDSCH信道的位置解析Paging消息的内容。DCI的字段包含短消息指示(short message indicator),short message等字段。Generally, the content of the Paging message (paging message) is sent to the terminal device through the physical downlink service channel (PDSCH) resource location, and the PDSCH resource is indicated by the P-RNTI (where P-RNTI is a fixed value for the entire network) scrambled PDCCH. In other words, in order to obtain the Paging message, the terminal device must first wake up periodically to monitor the PDCCH channel scrambled by P-RNTI, and then parse the DCI to further obtain the time-frequency location of the PDSCH channel. The terminal device parses the content of the Paging message at the corresponding PDSCH channel location. The DCI field contains fields such as short message indicator and short message.
可选地,对于DCI中的short message字段而言,如果网络设备向终端设备发送paging只为了寻呼,则该字段保留(或称不起作用,终端设备将会忽略该字段),short message主要用于指示除寻呼外的系统信息更新。终端设备在收到DCI中short message字段的系统消息更新指示后,会在下一个变更周期(modification period)去接收新的系统消息。Optionally, for the short message field in the DCI, if the network device sends paging to the terminal device only for paging, this field is reserved (or has no effect, the terminal device will ignore this field). Short message is mainly used to indicate system information updates other than paging. After receiving the system message update indication in the short message field in the DCI, the terminal device will receive new system messages in the next modification period.
此外,Paging消息所占的频域资源是由P-RNTI加扰的PDCCH指定的。而在时域上,终端设备会在其Paging周期内的某个特定帧(称为PF)的PO去尝试接收Paging消息,所以网络设备需要在该时刻将Paging消息从空口上发出,这样终端设备才有可能在这个时刻接收到Paging消息。PF是一个无线帧,该帧可能包含一个或多个PO。PO是PDCCH monitoring occasions的集合,可能包含多个时隙(slots)(或者帧,子帧,符号等),在该PO上可能会有使用P-RNTI加扰,并指示Paging消息的PDCCH。当使用了非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX),终端设备在每个DRX周期(DRX cycle)上需要检测1个PO,也就是说,对应每个终端设备,在每个Paging周期内有1个PO可用于发送Paging。其中,DRX cycle与Paging周期是同一概念。In addition, the frequency domain resources occupied by the Paging message are specified by the PDCCH scrambled by P-RNTI. In the time domain, the terminal device will try to receive the Paging message at the PO of a specific frame (called PF) within its Paging cycle, so the network device needs to send the Paging message from the air interface at this moment, so that the terminal device can receive the Paging message at this moment. PF is a radio frame, which may contain one or more POs. PO is a collection of PDCCH monitoring occasions, which may contain multiple slots (or frames, subframes, symbols, etc.), on which there may be a PDCCH scrambled by P-RNTI and indicating the Paging message. When discontinuous reception (DRX) is used, the terminal device needs to detect 1 PO in each DRX cycle (DRX cycle), that is, for each terminal device, there is 1 PO in each Paging cycle that can be used to send Paging. Among them, DRX cycle and Paging cycle are the same concept.
可选地,用于寻呼的PF和PO由以下方式确定。Optionally, the PF and PO used for paging are determined in the following manner.
PF的系统帧号(记为(SFN+PF_offset)mod T),通过以下方式确定:
(SFN+PF_offset)mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N);The system frame number of PF (denoted as (SFN+PF_offset) mod T) is determined by:
(SFN+PF_offset) mod T = (T div N) * (UE_ID mod N);
(SFN+PF_offset)mod T=(T div N)*(UE_ID mod N);The system frame number of PF (denoted as (SFN+PF_offset) mod T) is determined by:
(SFN+PF_offset) mod T = (T div N) * (UE_ID mod N);
PO的索引(记为i_s),通过以下方式确定:
i_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns;The index of PO (denoted as i_s) is determined by:
i_s = floor(UE_ID/N) mod Ns;
i_s=floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns;The index of PO (denoted as i_s) is determined by:
i_s = floor(UE_ID/N) mod Ns;
各参数的意义如下表1所示:The meaning of each parameter is shown in Table 1 below:
表1
Table 1
Table 1
由上述内容可知:系统消息更新可通过用于指示paging消息频域位置的DCI中的short message字段指示。此外,每个终端设备的PF和PO与自己的UE_ID有关。一般地,终端设备为了省电,会在自己的UE_ID相关的PF和PO上检测PDCCH,接收DCI,进而接收paging消息,特别是当配置了DRX时,终端设备在一个DRX周期内只会在一个PO内接收。每个终端设备的PO网络设备是知道的,当网络设备想要寻呼某个终端设备时,就会在其对应的PO的时域资源内发送Paging消息,而如果网络设备想要给所有终端设备广播系统消息更新,就会在所有终端设备的PO时域资源内发送Paging消息。From the above content, it can be seen that: the system message update can be indicated by the short message field in the DCI used to indicate the frequency domain position of the paging message. In addition, the PF and PO of each terminal device are related to its own UE_ID. Generally, in order to save power, the terminal device will detect PDCCH on the PF and PO related to its own UE_ID, receive DCI, and then receive the paging message. In particular, when DRX is configured, the terminal device will only receive in one PO in a DRX cycle. The network device knows the PO of each terminal device. When the network device wants to page a terminal device, it will send a Paging message in the time domain resources of its corresponding PO. If the network device wants to broadcast system message updates to all terminal devices, it will send a Paging message in the PO time domain resources of all terminal devices.
(5)接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)技术。(5) Integrated access and backhaul (IAB) technology.
IAB技术可以通过接入链路(Access Link)和回传链路(Backhaul Link)皆采用无线传输方案,可以减少光纤部署;并且,能够满足网络容量的提升、更广的覆盖需求、超高可靠超低时延等。IAB technology can use wireless transmission solutions for both access links (Access Link) and backhaul links (Backhaul Link), which can reduce fiber optic deployment; and can meet the needs of increased network capacity, wider coverage, ultra-high reliability and ultra-low latency.
在IAB网络中,中继节点,或者叫IAB节点(IAB-node),可以为终端设备提供无线接入服务,终端设备的业务数据由IAB-node通过无线回传链路连接到IAB宿主(IAB-donor)传输。IAB-node由MT部分和DU部分组成,其中,当IAB-node面向其父节点时,可以作为终端设备,即MT的角色;当IAB-node面向其子节点(子节点可能是另一IAB-node,或者普通终端设备)时,其被视为网络设备,即作为DU的角色。IAB-donor是一个具有完整基站(例如gNB)功能的接入网网元,包括CU和DU,IAB-donor连接到为终端设备服务的核心网(例如连接到5G核心网)。In the IAB network, the relay node, or IAB-node, can provide wireless access services for terminal devices. The service data of the terminal device is transmitted by the IAB-node to the IAB host (IAB-donor) through the wireless backhaul link. The IAB-node consists of an MT part and a DU part. When the IAB-node faces its parent node, it can act as a terminal device, that is, the role of MT; when the IAB-node faces its child node (the child node may be another IAB-node, or an ordinary terminal device), it is regarded as a network device, that is, the role of DU. The IAB-donor is an access network element with complete base station (such as gNB) functions, including CU and DU. The IAB-donor is connected to the core network that serves the terminal device (for example, connected to the 5G core network).
下面将结合图1a至图1b所示实现示例对IAB网络进行介绍。The IAB network will be introduced below in conjunction with the implementation examples shown in FIG. 1a and FIG. 1b .
如图1a所示,为无线中继场景的一个示意图。FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a wireless relay scenario.
在图1a所示的IAB网络中,终端设备包括UE1和UE2,IAB节点包括IAB节点1(IAB Node 1)至IAB节点5(IAB Node 5),以及IAB宿主(donor)节点。在任一UE和IAB-donor之间的一条传输路径上,可以包含一个或多个IAB-node。每个IAB-node需要维护面向父节点的无线回传链路,还需要维护和子节点的无线链路。若IAB-node的子节点是终端设备(如图1a中的UE1或UE2),则该IAB-node和子节点(即UE)之间是无线接入链路。若IAB-node的子节点是其他IAB-node,该IAB-node和子节点(即其他IAB-node)之间是无线回传链路。示例性的,在图1a中,在路径“UE1→IAB-node4→IAB-node3→IAB-node1→IAB-donor”中,UE1通过无线接入链路接入IAB-node4,IAB-node4通过无线回传链路连接到IAB-node3,IAB-node3通过无线回传链路连接到IAB-node1,IAB-node1通过无线回传链路连接到IAB-donor。In the IAB network shown in FIG1a, the terminal devices include UE1 and UE2, and the IAB nodes include IAB Node 1 to IAB Node 5, and an IAB donor node. One or more IAB-nodes may be included in a transmission path between any UE and an IAB-donor. Each IAB-node needs to maintain a wireless backhaul link to the parent node, and also needs to maintain a wireless link with the child node. If the child node of the IAB-node is a terminal device (such as UE1 or UE2 in FIG1a), the wireless access link is between the IAB-node and the child node (ie, the UE). If the child node of the IAB-node is another IAB-node, the wireless backhaul link is between the IAB-node and the child node (ie, the other IAB-node). For example, in Figure 1a, in the path "UE1→IAB-node4→IAB-node3→IAB-node1→IAB-donor", UE1 accesses IAB-node4 through a wireless access link, IAB-node4 is connected to IAB-node3 through a wireless backhaul link, IAB-node3 is connected to IAB-node1 through a wireless backhaul link, and IAB-node1 is connected to IAB-donor through a wireless backhaul link.
如图1b所示,为无线中继场景通过独立(standalone,SA)组网实现的一个示意图。As shown in FIG. 1b , it is a schematic diagram of realizing a wireless relay scenario through standalone (SA) networking.
如图1b所示,通信节点包括5G核心网(5G core,5GC),5G接入网设备(图中记为gNodeB),IAB-donor,以及一个或多个IAB-node。在图1b中,IAB-node DU(后续简单表述为IAB-DU)在逻辑上通过F1接口连接至IAB-donor CU(后续简单表述为CU),实际上,IAB-DU与CU的连接是通过每一跳的IAB-node MT与父节点DU之间的NR Uu接口实现的,但由于最终IAB-DU能够与CU通信,可以认为在逻辑上存在F1接口。As shown in Figure 1b, the communication nodes include the 5G core network (5G core, 5GC), the 5G access network equipment (denoted as gNodeB in the figure), the IAB-donor, and one or more IAB-nodes. In Figure 1b, the IAB-node DU (hereinafter simply referred to as IAB-DU) is logically connected to the IAB-donor CU (hereinafter simply referred to as CU) through the F1 interface. In fact, the connection between the IAB-DU and the CU is realized through the NR Uu interface between the IAB-node MT and the parent node DU of each hop, but because the IAB-DU can communicate with the CU in the end, it can be considered that the F1 interface exists logically.
可选地,F1接口支持用户面协议(F1-user plane,F1-U)和控制面协议(F1-control plane,F1-C),其中,用户面协议包括以下协议层的一个或多个:通用无线分组业务协议用户面(general packet radio service tunneling protocol user plane,GTP-U),用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol,UDP)、因特网协议(internet protocol,IP)等协议层。控制面协议包括以下中的一个或者多个:F1应用协议(F1application protocol,F1AP)、流控传输协议(stream control transport protocol,SCTP)、IP等协议层。通过F1-C,IAB-donor和IAB-node之间可以进行接口管理、对IAB-DU进行管理、以及执行UE上下文相关的配置等。通过F1-U,IAB-donor和IAB-node之间可以执行用户面数据的传输,以及
下行传输状态反馈等功能。Optionally, the F1 interface supports a user plane protocol (F1-user plane, F1-U) and a control plane protocol (F1-control plane, F1-C), wherein the user plane protocol includes one or more of the following protocol layers: general packet radio service tunneling protocol user plane (GTP-U), user datagram protocol (UDP), internet protocol (IP) and other protocol layers. The control plane protocol includes one or more of the following: F1 application protocol (F1AP), stream control transport protocol (SCTP), IP and other protocol layers. Through F1-C, interface management, IAB-DU management, and UE context-related configuration can be performed between the IAB-donor and the IAB-node. Through F1-U, user plane data transmission can be performed between the IAB-donor and the IAB-node, and Downlink transmission status feedback and other functions.
(6)跨CU迁移。在IAB网络中,对于终端设备与IAB-donor节点之间的任一IAB节点而言,支持跨CU迁移。(6) Inter-CU migration: In the IAB network, for any IAB node between the terminal device and the IAB-donor node, inter-CU migration is supported.
其中,在跨CU迁移的切换场景中,发生迁移的IAB节点可以称为边界节点(boundary node),并且以是否需要建立与目标CU之间的F1连接作为区分,将跨CU迁移分为部分迁移(Partial migration)和全部迁移(full migration)这两种场景。Among them, in the switching scenario of cross-CU migration, the IAB node where the migration occurs can be called a boundary node, and the cross-CU migration is divided into two scenarios: partial migration and full migration, depending on whether an F1 connection needs to be established with the target CU.
下面将分别通过图2a至图2b所示场景进行介绍。The following will introduce the scenarios shown in Figures 2a and 2b respectively.
如图2a所示,为部分迁移的切换过程的一种实现示例,边界节点为IAB-node2。As shown in FIG. 2 a , it is an implementation example of a switching process of partial migration, where the boundary node is IAB-node2.
在切换前,终端设备与源CU(图中记为CU1)之间的通信链路分别经过IAB-node4(包括图中IAB-MT4和IAB-DU4),IAB-node2(包括图中IAB-MT2和IAB-DU2),IAB-node1(包括图中IAB-MT1和IAB-DU1)以及Donor-DU1。Before switching, the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU (denoted as CU1 in the figure) passes through IAB-node4 (including IAB-MT4 and IAB-DU4 in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure), IAB-node1 (including IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1 in the figure) and Donor-DU1.
在切换后,终端设备与源CU(图中记为CU1)之间的通信链路分别经过IAB-node4(包括图中IAB-MT4和IAB-DU4),IAB-node2(包括图中IAB-MT2和IAB-DU2),IAB-node3(包括图中IAB-MT3和IAB-DU3)以及Donor-DU1。After the switch, the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU (denoted as CU1 in the figure) passes through IAB-node4 (including IAB-MT4 and IAB-DU4 in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure), IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3 and IAB-DU3 in the figure) and Donor-DU1 respectively.
在图2a所示实现示例中,在Partial migration之前,IAB-MT2与CU1之间存在RRC连接,IAB-DU2与CU1之间存在F1接口,IAB-node2与IAB-donor通过源路径(经过由IAB-MT1和IAB-DU1构成的IAB-node1)进行通信。在Partial migration时,IAB-MT2发生了跨CU的小区切换,与CU2建立了RRC连接,但为了避免引入F1接口的重建立过程,IAB-DU2仍然与CU1保持F1接口,并不会与CU2建立F1接口,因此,CU1与IAB-DU2之间的通信路径变为了跨拓扑的:
图2a中,CU1和CU2分别称为F1接口上的终止CU(F1-terminating CU)和F1接口上的非终止CU(non-F1-terminating CU)。需要注意的是,数据在这条路径上传输时并不经过CU2,CU1与Donor-DU2是直接通过IP网络通信的。In the implementation example shown in Figure 2a, before partial migration, there is an RRC connection between IAB-MT2 and CU1, an F1 interface between IAB-DU2 and CU1, and IAB-node2 and IAB-donor communicate through the source path (through IAB-node1 composed of IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1). During partial migration, IAB-MT2 undergoes cross-CU cell switching and establishes an RRC connection with CU2. However, in order to avoid introducing the re-establishment process of the F1 interface, IAB-DU2 still maintains the F1 interface with CU1 and does not establish the F1 interface with CU2. Therefore, the communication path between CU1 and IAB-DU2 becomes cross-topology: In Figure 2a, CU1 and CU2 are respectively called the terminating CU on the F1 interface (F1-terminating CU) and the non-terminating CU on the F1 interface (non-F1-terminating CU). It should be noted that data does not pass through CU2 when transmitted on this path. CU1 and Donor-DU2 communicate directly through the IP network.
如图2b所示,为全部迁移的切换过程的一种实现示例,边界节点为IAB-node3。As shown in FIG. 2 b , it is an implementation example of the switching process of the entire migration, and the boundary node is IAB-node3.
在切换前,终端设备与源CU(图中记为CU1)之间的通信链路分别经过IAB-node3(包括图中IAB-MT3,IAB-DU3a和IAB-DU3b)中的IAB-DU3a和IAB-MT3,IAB-node1(包括图中IAB-MT1和IAB-DU1)以及Donor-DU1。Before switching, the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU (denoted as CU1 in the figure) passes through IAB-DU3a and IAB-MT3 in IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3, IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b in the figure), IAB-node1 (including IAB-MT1 and IAB-DU1 in the figure) and Donor-DU1.
在切换后,终端设备与源CU(图中记为CU1)之间的通信链路分别经过IAB-node3(包括图中IAB-MT3,IAB-DU3a和IAB-DU3b)中的IAB-DU3b和IAB-MT3,IAB-node2(包括图中IAB-MT2和IAB-DU2)以及Donor-DU1。切换后的路径可以称为目标路径(target path)。After the switch, the communication link between the terminal device and the source CU (denoted as CU1 in the figure) passes through IAB-DU3b and IAB-MT3 in IAB-node3 (including IAB-MT3, IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b in the figure), IAB-node2 (including IAB-MT2 and IAB-DU2 in the figure) and Donor-DU1. The path after the switch can be called the target path.
在图2b所示全部迁移的场景示例中,需要将IAB-DU3与CU1之间的F1接口迁移至CU2,由于协议不支持一个DU与两个CU同时存在F1接口,为了实现该切换过程,通过将IAB-DU3扩展为两个逻辑DU,即IAB-DU3a和IAB-DU3b,IAB-DU3a始终维持与CU1之间的F1接口,而IAB-DU3b用于与CU2建立新的F1接口,DU3a与DU3b可以视为两个DU,各自存在F1接口,终端设备需要做一次切换,由IAB-DU3a下的小区切换至IAB-DU3b的小区之下。全部迁移包括如下三种实现方式。In the scenario example of full migration shown in Figure 2b, the F1 interface between IAB-DU3 and CU1 needs to be migrated to CU2. Since the protocol does not support the simultaneous existence of F1 interfaces between one DU and two CUs, in order to implement the switching process, IAB-DU3 is expanded into two logical DUs, namely IAB-DU3a and IAB-DU3b. IAB-DU3a always maintains the F1 interface with CU1, while IAB-DU3b is used to establish a new F1 interface with CU2. DU3a and DU3b can be regarded as two DUs, each with an F1 interface. The terminal device needs to perform a switch from the cell under IAB-DU3a to the cell under IAB-DU3b. Full migration includes the following three implementation methods.
逐渐自上而下(Gradual Top-down),在该实现方式中,前几步与partial migration类似,首先按照partial migration的过程,切换MT3,建立DU3a与CU1之间的跨拓扑F1-C和F1-U,CU2在帮助建立DU3a与CU1之间的跨拓扑F1-C和F1-U时,也建立DU3b与CU2之间的F1-C和F1-U,然后将终端设备切换至DU3b下,终端设备可直接在target path上与CU2通信。Gradual Top-down. In this implementation, the first few steps are similar to partial migration. First, according to the partial migration process, MT3 is switched to establish cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3a and CU1. When CU2 helps to establish cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3a and CU1, it also establishes F1-C and F1-U between DU3b and CU2. Then the terminal device is switched to DU3b, and the terminal device can communicate with CU2 directly on the target path.
逐渐自下而上(Gradual Bottom-up),在该实现方式中,首先通过建立DU3b与CU2之间的跨拓扑F1-C和F1-U,使得终端设备能够切换到DU3b之下,建立DU3b与CU2之间通过IAB-Node1以及Donor-DU1的控制面和用户面数据传输,在终端设备切换成功后,再向MT发送切换命令或生效MT的切换命令,然后在target path上建立F1-C/F1-U,使得终端设备的流量能够迁移到target path。Gradual Bottom-up: In this implementation, first, the cross-topology F1-C and F1-U between DU3b and CU2 are established to enable the terminal device to switch to DU3b, and the control plane and user plane data transmission between DU3b and CU2 through IAB-Node1 and Donor-DU1 are established. After the terminal device switches successfully, a switching command is sent to MT or the switching command of MT is effective, and then F1-C/F1-U is established on the target path, so that the traffic of the terminal device can be migrated to the target path.
全嵌套(Full Nested),该实现方式与Gradual Bottom-up类似,首先通过建立DU3b与CU2之间的跨拓扑F1-C(只建立跨拓扑F1-C,用于CU2做切换判决时允许将终端设备切到DU3b之下,但不建立跨拓扑F1-U,不进行跨拓扑数据传输),使得终端设备能够允许切换到DU3b之下,在向所有终端设备发
送切换命令后,马上向MT发送切换命令或生效MT的切换命令,然后直接在target path上建立F1-C/F1-U,使得终端设备的流量能够迁移到target path。Full Nested: This implementation is similar to Gradual Bottom-up. First, a cross-topology F1-C is established between DU3b and CU2 (only cross-topology F1-C is established to allow CU2 to switch the terminal device to DU3b when making a switching decision, but cross-topology F1-U is not established, and cross-topology data transmission is not performed), so that the terminal device can be allowed to switch to DU3b. After sending the switching command, the switching command is immediately sent to the MT or the switching command of the MT is effective, and then F1-C/F1-U is directly established on the target path so that the traffic of the terminal device can be migrated to the target path.
由上述实现示例可知,Partial migration中,MT发生了跨CU切换,但DU仍然与源CU保持F1连接;而full migration中,DU需要与目标CU建立F1连接。From the above implementation example, we can see that in partial migration, MT switches across CUs, but DU still maintains an F1 connection with the source CU; while in full migration, DU needs to establish an F1 connection with the target CU.
可选地,在面向以负载均衡为出发点的IAB节点的迁移场景中,可以采用partial migration,通过切换MT,使得F1接口换一条路径传输,但不改变F1接口的锚点。Optionally, in a migration scenario for IAB nodes based on load balancing, partial migration can be used. By switching MT, the F1 interface can be transmitted over a different path without changing the anchor point of the F1 interface.
可选地,在面向因IAB节点移动导致的迁移场景中,在IAB节点移动范围较大时,仍然与源CU维持F1连接是不合适的,F1连接的锚点也需要变化到目标CU上,因此,full migration将有可能会是移动IAB的必选特性。Optionally, in a migration scenario caused by IAB node movement, when the IAB node moves over a large range, it is inappropriate to maintain an F1 connection with the source CU, and the anchor point of the F1 connection also needs to be changed to the target CU. Therefore, full migration may be a required feature of mobile IAB.
(7)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如“A,B和C中的至少一项”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC或ABC。以及,除非有特别说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。(7) The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of the present application can be used interchangeably. "Multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the objects associated with each other are in an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC or ABC. And, unless otherwise specified, the ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实施例、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例、以及各实施例中的各个方法/设计/实现方式中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例、方法、或实现方式。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between the various embodiments can refer to each other. In the various embodiments in this application, and the various methods/designs/implementations in each embodiment, if there is no special description and logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments and the various methods/designs/implementations in each embodiment are consistent and can be referenced to each other. The technical features in different embodiments and the various methods/designs/implementations in each embodiment can be combined to form new embodiments, methods, or implementations according to their inherent logical relationships. The implementation methods of this application described below do not constitute a limitation on the scope of protection of this application.
图3是本申请的实施例应用的通信系统1000的架构示意图。FIG3 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system 1000 used in an embodiment of the present application.
如图3所示,该通信系统包括无线接入网100和核心网200,可选的,通信系统1000还可以包括互联网300。其中,无线接入网100可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备(也可理解为前文所介绍的一种网络设备,如图3中的110a和110b),还可以包括至少一个终端(也可理解为前文所介绍的终端设备,如图3中的120a-120j)。此外,无线接入网设备可以是宏基站(如图3中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图3中的110b),还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。可以理解,本申请中的无线接入网设备的全部或部分功能也可以通过在硬件上运行的软件功能来实现,或者通过平台(例如云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能来实现。本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。As shown in FIG3 , the communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include the Internet 300. The wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (which may also be understood as a network device introduced in the foregoing text, such as 110a and 110b in FIG3 ), and may also include at least one terminal (which may also be understood as a terminal device introduced in the foregoing text, such as 120a-120j in FIG3 ). In addition, the wireless access network device may be a macro base station (such as 110a in FIG3 ), a micro base station or an indoor station (such as 110b in FIG3 ), or a relay node or a donor node, etc. It can be understood that all or part of the functions of the wireless access network device in the present application may also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform). The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the wireless access network device.
为了便于描述,以基站作为无线接入网设备,且终端设备记为终端作为示例进行描述。可以理解的是,当通信系统包括IAB网络的情况下,基站可以为IAB节点。For the convenience of description, a base station is used as a wireless access network device, and a terminal device is recorded as a terminal as an example for description. It can be understood that when the communication system includes an IAB network, the base station can be an IAB node.
本申请中,基站和终端可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。基站和终端可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载,也可以部署在水面上,还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对基站和终端的应用场景不做限定。In this application, the base station and the terminal can be fixed or movable. The base station and the terminal can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted, or on the water surface, or on aircraft, balloons, and artificial satellites in the air. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the base station and the terminal.
基站和终端的角色可以是相对的,例如,图3中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动基站,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端120j来说,终端120i是基站。但对于基站110a来说,120i是终端,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过基站与基站之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是基站。因此,基站和终端都可以统一称为通信装置,图3中的110a和110b可以称为具有基站功能的通信装置,图3中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端功能的通信装置。The roles of the base station and the terminal may be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in FIG. 3 may be configured as a mobile base station. For the terminal 120j that accesses the wireless access network 100 through 120i, the terminal 120i is a base station. However, for the base station 110a, 120i is a terminal, that is, 110a and 120i communicate through a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, 110a and 120i may also communicate through an interface protocol between base stations. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, base stations and terminals may be collectively referred to as communication devices. 110a and 110b in FIG. 3 may be referred to as communication devices with base station functions, and 120a-120j in FIG. 3 may be referred to as communication devices with terminal functions.
基站和终端之间、基站和基站之间、终端和终端之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信。可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。
Communication between base stations and terminals, between base stations and base stations, and between terminals and terminals can be carried out through authorized spectrum, unauthorized spectrum, or both. Communication can be carried out through spectrum below 6 gigahertz (GHz), spectrum above 6 GHz, or spectrum below 6 GHz and spectrum above 6 GHz at the same time. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
在本申请的实施例中,基站的功能也可以由基站中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有基站功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有基站功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述终端的应用场景中的控制中心。终端的功能也可以由终端中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端功能的装置来执行。In the embodiments of the present application, the functions of the base station may also be performed by a module (such as a chip) in the base station, or by a control subsystem including the base station function. The control subsystem including the base station function here may be a control center in the application scenarios of the above-mentioned terminals such as smart grid, industrial control, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The functions of the terminal may also be performed by a module (such as a chip or a modem) in the terminal, or by a device including the terminal function.
在本申请中,基站向终端发送下行信号(或下行信息),下行信号(或下行信息)承载在下行信道上。终端向基站发送上行信号(或上行信息),上行信号(或上行信息)承载在上行信道上。In this application, the base station sends a downlink signal (or downlink information) to the terminal, and the downlink signal (or downlink information) is carried on a downlink channel. The terminal sends an uplink signal (or uplink information) to the base station, and the uplink signal (or uplink information) is carried on an uplink channel.
应理解,本申请可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者是5G之后演进的通信系统(例如6G等)。其中,该通信系统中包括网络设备和终端设备。It should be understood that the present application can be applied to a long term evolution (LTE) system, a new radio (NR) system, or a communication system evolved after 5G (such as 6G, etc.). The communication system includes a network device and a terminal device.
在通信系统中,终端设备接入某个小区之后,通过小区切换的方式,可以对终端设备所接入的小区进行切换。其中,在小区切换执行之前,终端设备接入的小区可以称为源小区,在小区切换执行之后,终端设备接入的小区可以称为目标小区。在小区切换的实现过程中,源小区在检测到与终端设备之间的信号质量恶化之后,可以下发携带目标小区的配置信息的切换消息,使得终端设备接收该消息之后可以基于该目标小区的配置信息接入该目标小区。In a communication system, after a terminal device accesses a cell, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be switched by cell switching. Before the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a source cell, and after the cell switching is performed, the cell accessed by the terminal device can be called a target cell. In the process of implementing the cell switching, after the source cell detects that the signal quality between the source cell and the terminal device has deteriorated, it can send a switching message carrying the configuration information of the target cell, so that the terminal device can access the target cell based on the configuration information of the target cell after receiving the message.
然而,上述实现方式中,网络设备需要在检测到信号质量恶化的情况下才会触发向终端设备发送该切换消息,有可能由于该信号质量过差导致该切换消息的传输较慢,影响小区切换的速度甚至造成小区切换失败。However, in the above implementation, the network device needs to trigger the sending of the switching message to the terminal device only when it detects that the signal quality has deteriorated. The transmission of the switching message may be slow due to the poor signal quality, affecting the speed of cell switching or even causing cell switching failure.
一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备可以在信号质量恶化之前向终端设备发送需要基于测量事件触发的CHO配置信息,使得终端设备在本地基于测量事件确定信号质量恶化之后,该终端设备基于该CHO配置信息执行小区切换,能够加快终端设备切换的速度,一定程度上能够避免了传统切换流程中当信号质量恶化后才进行切换准备可能导致的切换失败。但是,该实现方式仍然将小区切换的触发方式定位在信号质量恶化的场景,而在终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如图2b所示场景中源小区所在的IAB节点发生跨CU迁移且启用目标CU所对应的IAB-DU3b中新配置的小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),将会导致基于测量事件触发的CHO配置信息将不会生效,仍然达不到提升小区切换速度以提升小区切换成功率的效果。In a possible implementation, the network device can send CHO configuration information that needs to be triggered based on a measurement event to the terminal device before the signal quality deteriorates, so that after the terminal device determines that the signal quality has deteriorated locally based on the measurement event, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the CHO configuration information, which can speed up the switching speed of the terminal device and, to a certain extent, avoid the switching failure that may be caused by the switching preparation only after the signal quality deteriorates in the traditional switching process. However, this implementation still positions the triggering method of cell switching in the scenario of signal quality deterioration, and when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, in the scenario shown in FIG. 2b, the IAB node where the source cell is located undergoes cross-CU migration and the newly configured cell in the IAB-DU3b corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be closed or deactivated, etc.), the CHO configuration information triggered based on the measurement event will not take effect, and still cannot achieve the effect of improving the cell switching speed to improve the cell switching success rate.
综上所述,如何提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率,是一个亟待解决的技术问题。In summary, how to improve the execution speed of cell switching in order to improve the success rate of cell switching is a technical problem that needs to be solved urgently.
为了解决上述问题,本申请提供的一种通信方法及相关设备,用于节省触发小区切换过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。下面将结合附图进一步描述。In order to solve the above problems, the present application provides a communication method and related devices for saving the overhead of triggering the cell switching process, improving the execution speed of the cell switching, and thereby improving the success rate of the cell switching.
请参阅图4,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG. 4 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
S401.源CU确定第一消息。S401. The source CU determines the first message.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S401中确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程。In this embodiment, the source CU determines a first message in step S401, where the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
S402.源CU向终端设备发送第一消息。S402. The source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S402中通过IAB节点向终端设备发送第一消息,相应的,终端设备在步骤S402中接收该第一消息。In this embodiment, the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device through the IAB node in step S402, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S402.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该目标DU位于该IAB节点。具体地,终端设备所连接的IAB节点包括源小区所在的源DU,该目标小区所在的目标DU位于该源DU所在的IAB节点的情况下,使得该方案能够应用于终端设备在同一IAB节点中不同DU之间执行小区切换的场景(或者说IAB节点发生跨CU迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的场景)。In a possible implementation, the target DU is located at the IAB node. Specifically, when the IAB node to which the terminal device is connected includes the source DU where the source cell is located, and the target DU where the target cell is located is located at the IAB node where the source DU is located, the solution can be applied to the scenario where the terminal device performs cell switching between different DUs in the same IAB node (or the scenario where the IAB node undergoes cross-CU migration and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled).
可选地,在目标DU位于该IAB节点的情况下,终端设备与该IAB节点之间可以为直连链路(即两者之间不存在其它IAB节点),或者,终端设备与该IAB节点之间还可以为非直连链路(即两者之间还可能存在其它IAB节点),此处不做限定。Optionally, when the target DU is located at the IAB node, the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a direct link (i.e., there is no other IAB node between the two), or the link between the terminal device and the IAB node can be a non-direct link (i.e., there may be other IAB nodes between the two), which is not limited here.
可选地,目标DU也可以位于其它IAB节点。Optionally, the target DU may also be located at other IAB nodes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,源CU在步骤S402中发送的第一消息还包括以下至少一项:第一指示信
息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。具体地,包含有N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息还可以包括上述至少一项指示信息,通过显示携带指示信息的方式指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,和/或,指示在全部PO上监测第二消息,以便于该终端设备基于该显示携带的指示信息明确小区切换的执行。In a possible implementation, the first message sent by the source CU in step S402 further includes at least one of the following: a first indication message Information indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message; or, second indication information indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs. Specifically, the first message containing the switching configuration information of N cells may also include at least one of the above-mentioned indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message by displaying the indication information, and/or indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs, so that the terminal device can clearly determine the execution of the cell switching based on the indication information carried by the display.
可选地,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)中的全部PO,或,第二指示信息指示的全部PO指的是终端设备能够感知的PF中的任一PO。Optionally, all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to all POs in a paging frame (PF) that can be perceived by the terminal device, or all POs indicated by the second indication information refer to any PO in the PF that can be perceived by the terminal device.
可选地,该第二消息为广播消息。具体地,第一消息携带的切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,即该第二消息用于触发终端设备执行小区切换过程,从而,该第二消息为广播方式发送的消息(即广播消息)的实现方式能够基于该广播消息的调度触发多个终端设备执行小区切换,以节省开销。并且,能够提升第二消息的下发速度,以期提升多个终端设备基于该广播消息触发执行小区切换的速度。Optionally, the second message is a broadcast message. Specifically, the switching configuration information carried by the first message is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, that is, the second message is used to trigger the terminal device to perform the cell switching process, so that the implementation method of the second message being a message sent in a broadcast manner (i.e., a broadcast message) can trigger multiple terminal devices to perform cell switching based on the scheduling of the broadcast message to save overhead. In addition, the sending speed of the second message can be increased, in order to increase the speed at which multiple terminal devices perform cell switching based on the broadcast message trigger.
可选地,N的取值为1。具体地,N的取值为1时,第一消息包含有某一个小区的切换配置信息的实现方式能够节省该第一消息的开销的同时,也能够降低终端设备在执行小区切换过程中监测多个小区的信号的开销。Optionally, the value of N is 1. Specifically, when the value of N is 1, the implementation method in which the first message includes the switching configuration information of a certain cell can save the overhead of the first message and also reduce the overhead of the terminal device monitoring signals of multiple cells during the cell switching process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,源CU在步骤S402中发送的第一消息所包含的切换配置信息为条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)配置信息。可选地,第一消息所包含的切换配置信息为CHO配置信息的情况下,该CHO配置信息对应的触发条件即为基于第二消息触发。此外,CHO配置信息为当前标准/协议中对于基于触发条件触发执行小区切换的切换配置信息的名称,在未来的标准/协议中,CHO配置信息还有可能为其它的名称,此处不做限定。In a possible implementation, the handover configuration information included in the first message sent by the source CU in step S402 is conditional handover (CHO) configuration information. Optionally, when the handover configuration information included in the first message is CHO configuration information, the trigger condition corresponding to the CHO configuration information is triggered based on the second message. In addition, the CHO configuration information is the name of the handover configuration information for executing cell handover based on the trigger condition in the current standard/protocol. In future standards/protocols, the CHO configuration information may have other names, which are not limited here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在步骤S401之前,该方法还包括:源CU在确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接之后,向该目标CU发送该终端的切换请求消息;源CU接收来自该目标CU的切换响应消息,该切换响应消息包括该切换配置信息。具体地,源CU在确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接之后,源CU确定目标DU下的小区能够作为潜在的目标小区,为此,该源CU可以与目标CU之间通过切换请求消息与切换响应消息的交互方式获取该切换配置信息,以便于后续该源CU向终端设备发送包含有该切换配置信息的第一消息。In a possible implementation, before step S401, the method further includes: after the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU sends a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU; the source CU receives a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information. Specifically, after the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU can be used as a potential target cell. To this end, the source CU can obtain the switching configuration information through the interaction of the switching request message and the switching response message with the target CU, so that the source CU can subsequently send a first message containing the switching configuration information to the terminal device.
可选地,该源CU确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接包括:源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。具体地,源CU可以通过目标CU所发送的第三指示信息确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接,并进一步确定终端设备能够基于切换配置信息成功执行小区切换切换至目标DU。Optionally, the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU based on third indication information from the target CU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs a cell switch based on the switching configuration information. Specifically, the source CU can determine that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU through the third indication information sent by the target CU, and further determine that the terminal device can successfully perform a cell switch to the target DU based on the switching configuration information.
可选地,第三指示信息还可以通过其它方式实现,例如,该第三指示信息指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换;又如,该第三指示信息指示(允许)源CU向终端设备发送N个小区的切换配置信息;又如,第三指示信息指示目标DU中的N个小区已激活。Optionally, the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下任一项时,源CU在步骤S402中发送该第一消息,包括:In a possible implementation, when any of the following conditions is met, the source CU sends the first message in step S402, including:
源CU向该目标CU发送第一切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第一切换响应消息,该第一切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息(为便于后文引用,该方式记为方式A);After the source CU sends a first handover request message to the target CU, the source CU receives a first handover response message from the target CU, where the first handover response message includes handover configuration information of N cells (for ease of reference in the following text, this method is referred to as method A);
源CU向该目标CU发送第二切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第二切换响应消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区(为便于后文引用,该方式记为方式B);或,After the source CU sends a second handover request message to the target CU, the source CU receives a second handover response message from the target CU, where the second handover request message includes identifiers of N cells, and the N cells are inactivated cells (for ease of reference in the following text, this method is referred to as method B); or,
源CU接收来自该目标DU的第一配置信息并向该目标CU发送该第一配置信息之后,接收来自该目标CU的N个小区的切换配置信息,且该N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息(为便于后文引用,该方式记为方式C)。After the source CU receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information (for ease of reference below, this method is recorded as method C).
在上述方式A中,源CU确定目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接的情况下,源CU与目标CU之间可以通过第一切换请求消息和第一切换响应消息的交互,使得源CU能够获取目标DU下的N个小区的切换配置信息。相应的,源CU获取该N个小区的配置信息之后,源CU可以在步骤S402中向终端设备发送包
含有该N个小区的配置信息的第一消息。In the above-mentioned method A, when the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, the source CU and the target CU can interact through the first handover request message and the first handover response message, so that the source CU can obtain the handover configuration information of the N cells under the target DU. Accordingly, after the source CU obtains the configuration information of the N cells, the source CU can send a packet to the terminal device in step S402. The first message contains the configuration information of the N cells.
可以理解的是,在方式A中,目标CU与目标DU之间的F1连接完成的时刻位于源CU在步骤S402中向终端设备下发配置信息的时刻之前,该方案可以适用于full migration的full nested和gradual bottom-up流程。此时,目标DU已准备就绪,且目标DU下的N个小区可以在第一消息中被配置为终端设备的潜在目标小区。It can be understood that in mode A, the moment when the F1 connection between the target CU and the target DU is completed is before the moment when the source CU sends the configuration information to the terminal device in step S402, and this solution can be applied to the full nested and gradual bottom-up processes of full migration. At this time, the target DU is ready, and the N cells under the target DU can be configured as potential target cells of the terminal device in the first message.
在上述方式B中,源CU在确定目标DU有可能需要切换至目标CU的情况下,该源CU可以确定目标CU下的N个小区为终端设备的潜在目标小区。为此,该源CU与目标CU之间可以通过第而切换请求消息和第二切换响应消息的交互,以告知目标CU该目标DU将有可能切换至该目标CU之后,该源CU可以在步骤S402中向终端设备发送包含有该N个小区的配置信息的第一消息。In the above-mentioned method B, when the source CU determines that the target DU may need to switch to the target CU, the source CU may determine that the N cells under the target CU are potential target cells of the terminal device. To this end, the source CU and the target CU may interact through a first switching request message and a second switching response message to inform the target CU that the target DU may switch to the target CU. After that, the source CU may send a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
可以理解的是,在方式B中,目标CU与目标DU之间的F1连接完成的时刻位于源CU在步骤S402中向终端设备下发配置信息的时刻之后,该方案可以适用于full migration的gradual top-down流程。示例性的,在gradual top-down中,目标DU与目标CU之间的F1连接在几乎是在最后才建立的,如果想要拿到提前配置N个小区的配置信息的增益,则需要提前下发包含有N个小区的配置信息的第一消息,在步骤S402中该第一消息的发送时刻,目标DU中的N个小区还没有激活,当前无法进行真正的切换准备流程。It is understandable that, in mode B, the moment when the F1 connection between the target CU and the target DU is completed is after the moment when the source CU sends the configuration information to the terminal device in step S402, and this solution can be applied to the gradual top-down process of full migration. Exemplarily, in the gradual top-down, the F1 connection between the target DU and the target CU is established almost at the end. If you want to get the gain of the configuration information of N cells configured in advance, you need to send the first message containing the configuration information of N cells in advance. At the time of sending the first message in step S402, the N cells in the target DU have not been activated, and the real switching preparation process cannot be performed at present.
在上述方式C中,源CU在确定目标DU有可能需要切换至目标CU的情况下,源CU可以从目标DU获取第一配置信息,并且向目标CU发送该第一配置信息,以告知目标CU该目标DU将有可能切换至该目标CU,使得目标CU基于该第一配置信息确定并向源CU发送N个小区的配置信息。相应的,源CU获取该N个小区的配置信息之后,源CU可以在步骤S402中向终端设备发送包含有该N个小区的配置信息的第一消息。In the above-mentioned method C, when the source CU determines that the target DU may need to switch to the target CU, the source CU may obtain the first configuration information from the target DU and send the first configuration information to the target CU to inform the target CU that the target DU may switch to the target CU, so that the target CU determines the configuration information of N cells based on the first configuration information and sends it to the source CU. Accordingly, after the source CU obtains the configuration information of the N cells, the source CU may send a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
可选地,在方式C中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层配置信息。具体地,在目标DU与目标CU之间尚未建立F1连接的情况下,目标DU可以通过源CU向目标CU发送该第一配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC层配置信息),使得目标CU基于该第一配置信息确定该目标DU下的N个小区的切换配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC配置信息,以及PDCP和/或SDAP配置信息),并且目标CU能够通过源CU以第一消息的方式向终端设备发送该N个小区的切换配置信息。Optionally, in mode C, the first configuration information includes radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer configuration information and/or media access control (media access control, MAC) layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer configuration information. Specifically, when an F1 connection has not been established between the target DU and the target CU, the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information) of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information, and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message.
可选地,目标CU向源CU发送的N个小区的切换配置信息可以承载于切换响应消息(例如前文的第一切换响应消息或第二切换响应消息等),或者其它消息。Optionally, the handover configuration information of the N cells sent by the target CU to the source CU may be carried in a handover response message (eg, the first handover response message or the second handover response message mentioned above), or other messages.
可以理解的是,类似于方式B,目标CU与目标DU之间的F1连接完成的时刻位于源CU在步骤S402中向终端设备下发配置信息的时刻之后,该方案可以适用于full migration的gradual top-down流程。It can be understood that, similar to method B, the moment when the F1 connection between the target CU and the target DU is completed is after the moment when the source CU sends the configuration information to the terminal device in step S402. This solution can be applied to the gradual top-down process of full migration.
在传统的切换方案中,源CU向终端设备发送的RRC重配置消息(携带有CHO切换命令)中,需要携带目标小区后的RLC层、MAC层配置以及PDCP层、SDAP层配置(例如该RRC重配置消息中的小区组配置(CellGroupConfig)信元携带该目标小区的RLC层、MAC层配置,该RRC重配置消息中的无线承载配置(RadioBearerConfig)信元包括了终端设备到达目标小区后的PDCP层、SDAP层配置)。也就是说,终端设备需要知道切换到目标小区后多个协议栈的配置。然而,RLC层、MAC层配置需要由目标DU生成,而更高层的PDCP层、SDAP层需要由目标CU生成,当目标DU与目标CU之间没有建立F1连接时,需要通过方式C提供的技术方案使得终端设备能够获取RLC层、MAC层配置以及PDCP层、SDAP层配置。In the traditional switching scheme, the RRC reconfiguration message (carrying the CHO switching command) sent by the source CU to the terminal device needs to carry the RLC layer, MAC layer configuration, and PDCP layer and SDAP layer configuration after the target cell (for example, the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) information element in the RRC reconfiguration message carries the RLC layer and MAC layer configuration of the target cell, and the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) information element in the RRC reconfiguration message includes the PDCP layer and SDAP layer configuration after the terminal device reaches the target cell). In other words, the terminal device needs to know the configuration of multiple protocol stacks after switching to the target cell. However, the RLC layer and MAC layer configurations need to be generated by the target DU, and the higher-layer PDCP layer and SDAP layer need to be generated by the target CU. When no F1 connection is established between the target DU and the target CU, the technical solution provided by method C is required to enable the terminal device to obtain the RLC layer, MAC layer configuration, and PDCP layer and SDAP layer configurations.
在方式C中,通过目标DU与源CU之间建立F1连接,使得目标DU中的N个小区的第一配置信息能够发送给源CU之后,经由源CU发送给目标CU,在目标CU处添加第二配置信息后,将完整的N个小区的配置信息发送至源CU(例如该N个小区的配置信息承载于无线资源控制容器(RRC Container)),再由源CU在步骤S402中向终端设备发送包含有该N个小区的配置信息的第一消息。In method C, an F1 connection is established between the target DU and the source CU so that the first configuration information of the N cells in the target DU can be sent to the source CU, and then sent to the target CU via the source CU. After the second configuration information is added at the target CU, the complete configuration information of the N cells is sent to the source CU (for example, the configuration information of the N cells is carried in a radio resource control container (RRC Container)), and then the source CU sends a first message containing the configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device in step S402.
具体地,在满足上述方式A、方式B和方式C中的至少一项时,源CU确定目标DU下的小区将会作为潜在的目标小区,为此,该源CU可以向终端设备发送包含有N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息,
使得在满足切换条件之前下发N个小区的切换配置信息,以便于后续确定需要调度终端设备切换至该N个小区并下发调度消息的情况下,能够节省该调度消息的信令消耗,以期提升小区切换成功率。Specifically, when at least one of the above-mentioned methods A, B and C is met, the source CU determines that the cell under the target DU will be used as a potential target cell. To this end, the source CU can send a first message containing switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device. The switching configuration information of N cells is sent before the switching conditions are met, so that when it is subsequently determined that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to switch to the N cells and the scheduling message is sent, the signaling consumption of the scheduling message can be saved, thereby improving the success rate of cell switching.
S403.源CU向终端设备发送第二消息。S403. The source CU sends a second message to the terminal device.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S403中向终端设备发送第二消息,相应的,终端设备在步骤S403中接收该第二消息。In this embodiment, the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device in step S403, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second message in step S403.
在一种可能的实现方式中,源CU在步骤S403发送的第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:寻呼无线网络临时标识(paging radio network temporary identifier,P-RNTI)加扰的物理下行控制信道(physical download control channel,PDCCH)的下行控制信息(download control information,DCI)中的短消息(short message)字段;寻呼机会(paging occasion,PO)中的信息;或,N个小区的任一广播信息。具体地,第二消息可以通过上述任一项实现,换言之,源小区或N个小区可以通过上述任一项方式触发该终端设备执行小区切换,以提升方案实现的灵活性。In a possible implementation, the second message sent by the source CU in step S403 includes the first information, which is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information (DCI) of the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier (P-RNTI); information in the paging occasion (PO); or, any broadcast information of N cells. Specifically, the second message can be implemented by any of the above items. In other words, the source cell or N cells can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching by any of the above methods to improve the flexibility of the solution implementation.
可以理解的是,第一信息承载于short message字段的情况下,第二消息可以为DCI消息;第一信息承载于PO中的信息的情况下,第二消息可以为PO指示系统信息更新的消息;第一信息承载于N个小区的任一广播信息的情况下,第二消息可以为N个小区的任一广播发送的消息。It can be understood that, when the first information is carried in the short message field, the second message may be a DCI message; when the first information is carried in the information in the PO, the second message may be a message indicating a system information update by the PO; when the first information is carried in any broadcast information of N cells, the second message may be a message sent by any broadcast of the N cells.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,源CU在步骤S403中向该终端设备发送该第二消息,包括:源CU确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接;源CU确定该IAB节点中的移动终端(mobile termination,MT)将要切换至该目标CU;或,源CU接收来自该目标CU的指示允许该终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。具体地,在满足上述至少一项时,源CU确定终端设备当前能够执行小区切换并成功切换至该目标DU下的N个小区,为此,该源CU可以向终端设备发送第二消息,使得该终端设备基于接收的第二消息触发执行小区切换。In a possible implementation, when at least one of the following conditions is met, the source CU sends the second message to the terminal device in step S403, including: the source CU determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the source CU determines that the mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or the source CU receives an indication from the target CU to allow the terminal device to perform a cell switch based on the switching configuration information. Specifically, when at least one of the above conditions is met, the source CU determines that the terminal device is currently able to perform a cell switch and successfully switch to the N cells under the target DU. To this end, the source CU may send a second message to the terminal device, so that the terminal device triggers the execution of a cell switch based on the received second message.
S404.终端设备执行小区切换。S404. The terminal device performs cell switching.
本实施例中,终端设备在步骤S403中接收第二消息之后,触发执行步骤S404的小区切换过程,即触发该终端设备基于步骤S402中接收的切换配置信息执行小区切换。In this embodiment, after the terminal device receives the second message in step S403, the cell switching process of step S404 is triggered, that is, the terminal device is triggered to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information received in step S402.
基于图4所示技术方案,终端设备在步骤S402中接收包括N个小区的切换配置信息的第一消息,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,此后,该终端设备在步骤S403中接收该第二消息之后,在步骤S404中基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。从而,在确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the technical solution shown in FIG4 , the terminal device receives a first message including switching configuration information of N cells in step S402, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message. Thereafter, after receiving the second message in step S403, the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information in step S404. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message for triggering the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can trigger the execution of cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message. Thus, in the case of determining that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to execute cell switching, the second message for triggering the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, so as to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
此外,相比于终端设备基于信号质量恶化的测量事件而在本地触发小区切换的实现方式,上述通过第二消息触发执行小区切换的技术方案能够支持更多的小区切换场景,即终端设备与源小区之间的信号质量未发生恶化的情况下(例如源小区所在的接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)节点发生跨集中式单元(central unit,CU)迁移且启用目标CU所对应的目标小区的情况下,或,源小区所在的IAB节点需要调度终端设备连接至该IAB节点中的其他小区的情况下,或源小区所在的IAB节点确定将要关闭或去激活该源小区的情况下等),仍然能够通过第二消息触发执行小区切换,使得上述技术方案能够获得节省触发过程的开销并提升小区切换的执行速度的增益的情况下,也能够避免在信号质量未发生恶化时,由于终端设备无法在本地触发小区切换而导致小区切换无法执行的情况发生。In addition, compared to the implementation method in which the terminal device triggers cell switching locally based on a measurement event of signal quality deterioration, the above-mentioned technical solution of executing cell switching by triggering the second message can support more cell switching scenarios, that is, when the signal quality between the terminal device and the source cell has not deteriorated (for example, when the integrated access and backhaul (IAB) node where the source cell is located migrates across a centralized unit (CU) and the target cell corresponding to the target CU is enabled, or, when the IAB node where the source cell is located needs to schedule the terminal device to connect to other cells in the IAB node, or when the IAB node where the source cell is located determines that the source cell is to be shut down or deactivated, etc.), the cell switching can still be triggered by the second message, so that the above-mentioned technical solution can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, and can also avoid the situation where the cell switching cannot be executed because the terminal device cannot trigger the cell switching locally when the signal quality has not deteriorated.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在上述图4所示实现方式中,源CU在步骤S402中发送第一消息的过程和/或源CU在步骤S403中发送第二消息的过程有可能需要依赖于目标CU的指示。下面将基于图5所示实现方式进行详细说明。In a possible implementation, in the implementation shown in FIG4 , the process of the source CU sending the first message in step S402 and/or the process of the source CU sending the second message in step S403 may need to rely on the indication of the target CU. The following will be described in detail based on the implementation shown in FIG5 .
请参阅图5,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG5 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
S501.目标CU确定第三指示信息。S501. The target CU determines third indication information.
本实施例中,目标CU在步骤S501中确定第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示允许终端设备基
于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,该目标DU包括N个小区,N为正整数。In this embodiment, the target CU determines the third indication information in step S501, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is allowed to The cell switching is performed according to the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer.
可选地,第三指示信息还可以通过其它方式实现,例如,该第三指示信息指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换;又如,该第三指示信息指示(允许)源CU向终端设备发送N个小区的切换配置信息;又如,第三指示信息指示目标DU中的N个小区已激活。Optionally, the third indication information can also be implemented in other ways. For example, the third indication information indicates that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information; for example, the third indication information indicates (allows) the source CU to send switching configuration information of N cells to the terminal device; for example, the third indication information indicates that N cells in the target DU have been activated.
S502.目标CU向源CU发送第三指示信息。S502. The target CU sends third indication information to the source CU.
本实施例中,目标CU在步骤S501中确定第三指示信息之后,该目标CU在步骤S502中向源CU发送该第三指示信息。In this embodiment, after the target CU determines the third indication information in step S501, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502.
在一种可能的实现方式中,目标CU在步骤S502中向该源CU发送该第三指示信息包括:目标CU在确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。具体地,目标CU在确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,该目标CU可以确定终端设备能够通过该目标DU所包含的N个小区接入网络,为此没改目标CU可以向源CU发送该第三指示信息,以便于源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息调度终端设备执行小区切换。In a possible implementation, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502, including: after the target CU determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device, the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU. Specifically, after the target CU determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device, the target CU can determine that the terminal device can access the network through the N cells included in the target DU. For this purpose, the target CU can send the third indication information to the source CU, so that the source CU schedules the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,目标CU在步骤S502中向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该方法还包括:目标CU接收来自源集中式单元CU的第二切换请求消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;其中,N个小区位于该目标DU;目标CU向该源CU发送第二切换响应消息,该第二切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息。具体地,在目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该目标CU和源CU之间可以通过第二切换请求消息和第二切换响应消息的交互,使得目标CU基于未激活的N个小区确定相应的切换配置信息之后,通过源CU向终端设备发送该切换配置信息,以便于终端设备后续能够基于第二消息的触发执行该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程。In a possible implementation, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU in step S502, the method also includes: the target CU receives a second switching request message from the source centralized unit CU, the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the target CU sends a second switching response message to the source CU, the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells. Specifically, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the target CU and the source CU can interact through the second switching request message and the second switching response message, so that after the target CU determines the corresponding switching configuration information based on the N unactivated cells, the target CU sends the switching configuration information to the terminal device through the source CU, so that the terminal device can subsequently execute the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在目标CU向该源CU发送该第三指示信息之前,该方法还包括:目标CU接收来自源集中式单元CU的该第一配置信息之后,向该源CU发送N个小区的切换配置信息,N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。具体地,在目标DU与目标CU之间尚未建立F1连接的情况下,目标DU可以通过源CU向目标CU发送该第一配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC层配置信息),使得目标CU基于该第一配置信息确定该目标DU下的N个小区的切换配置信息(包括RLC和/或MAC配置信息,以及PDCP和/或SDAP配置信息),并且目标CU能够通过源CU以第一消息的方式向终端设备发送该N个小区的切换配置信息,以便于终端设备后续能够基于第二消息的触发执行该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程。In a possible implementation, before the target CU sends the third indication information to the source CU, the method also includes: after the target CU receives the first configuration information from the source centralized unit CU, the target CU sends the switching configuration information of N cells to the source CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information. Specifically, when an F1 connection has not yet been established between the target DU and the target CU, the target DU can send the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC layer configuration information) to the target CU through the source CU, so that the target CU determines the switching configuration information of the N cells under the target DU based on the first configuration information (including RLC and/or MAC configuration information, and PDCP and/or SDAP configuration information), and the target CU can send the switching configuration information of the N cells to the terminal device through the source CU in the form of a first message, so that the terminal device can subsequently perform the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information based on the triggering of the second message.
需要说明的是,上述实现方式可以参考前述图4实施例中方式A至方式C的实现过程,并实现相应的技术效果,此处不做赘述。It should be noted that the above implementation method can refer to the implementation process of method A to method C in the embodiment of Figure 4 above, and achieve corresponding technical effects, which will not be repeated here.
此外,图5所示实施例作为图4所示实施例的一种可选的实现过程,源CU在步骤S502接收第三指示信息可以作为源CU触发执行步骤S504的触发条件,即步骤S502的执行顺序在步骤S504之前。或者,源CU在步骤S502接收第三指示信息可以作为源CU触发执行步骤S505的触发条件,即步骤S502的执行顺序在步骤S505之前。In addition, the embodiment shown in FIG5 is an optional implementation process of the embodiment shown in FIG4 , and the source CU receiving the third indication information in step S502 can be used as a trigger condition for the source CU to trigger the execution of step S504, that is, the execution order of step S502 is before step S504. Alternatively, the source CU receiving the third indication information in step S502 can be used as a trigger condition for the source CU to trigger the execution of step S505, that is, the execution order of step S502 is before step S505.
S503.源CU确定第一消息。S503. The source CU determines the first message.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S503中确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程。In this embodiment, the source CU determines a first message in step S503, where the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
S504.源CU向终端设备发送第一消息。S504. The source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S504中向终端设备发送第一消息,相应的,终端设备在步骤S504中接收该第一消息。In this embodiment, the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device in step S504, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S504.
S505.源CU向终端设备发送第二消息。S505. The source CU sends a second message to the terminal device.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S505中向终端设备发送第二消息,相应的,终端设备在步骤S505中接收该第二消息。In this embodiment, the source CU sends a second message to the terminal device in step S505, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second message in step S505.
S506.终端设备执行小区切换。S506. The terminal device performs cell switching.
本实施例中,终端设备在步骤S505中接收第二消息之后,触发执行步骤S506的小区切换过程,即触发该终端设备基于步骤S505中接收的切换配置信息执行小区切换。
In this embodiment, after the terminal device receives the second message in step S505, the cell switching process of step S506 is triggered, that is, the terminal device is triggered to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information received in step S505.
需要说明的是,步骤S503至步骤S506的实现过程可以参考前述步骤S401至步骤S404的实现过程,并实现相应的技术效果,此处不做赘述。It should be noted that the implementation process of step S503 to step S506 can refer to the implementation process of the aforementioned step S401 to step S404, and achieve corresponding technical effects, which will not be repeated here.
基于图5所示技术方案,目标CU在确定与目标DU已建立F1连接之后,该目标CU可以确定终端设备能够基于小区切换过程切换至该目标DU所包含的N个小区,为此,该目标CU向源CU发送指示允许终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换的第三指示信息,以便于该源CU基于该第三指示信息确定能够触发该终端设备执行小区切换。其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,使得终端设备后续可以在接收该第二消息之后触发基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,以期提升小区切换成功率。相比于触发执行小区切换的切换消息中携带有目标小区的配置信息的实现方式,在源CU基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定需要调度终端设备执行小区切换的情况下,向该终端设备下发的触发执行小区切换的第二消息无需携带目标小区的切换配置信息,能够节省该触发过程的开销,提升小区切换的执行速度,以期提升小区切换成功率。Based on the technical solution shown in FIG5 , after the target CU determines that an F1 connection has been established with the target DU, the target CU can determine that the terminal device can switch to the N cells contained in the target DU based on the cell switching process. To this end, the target CU sends a third indication information to the source CU indicating that the terminal device is allowed to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, so that the source CU can determine that the terminal device can be triggered to perform cell switching based on the third indication information. Among them, the switching configuration information is used for the cell switching process triggered by the second message, so that the terminal device can subsequently trigger the cell switching based on the switching configuration information after receiving the second message, in order to improve the success rate of cell switching. Compared with the implementation method in which the switching message that triggers the execution of cell switching carries the configuration information of the target cell, when the source CU determines that the terminal device needs to be scheduled to perform cell switching based on the third indication information from the target CU, the second message that triggers the execution of cell switching sent to the terminal device does not need to carry the switching configuration information of the target cell, which can save the overhead of the triggering process and improve the execution speed of the cell switching, in order to improve the success rate of the cell switching.
请参阅图6,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG6 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
S601.源CU确定第一消息。S601. The source CU determines the first message.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S503中确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数。In this embodiment, the source CU determines a first message in step S503, where the first message includes handover configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer.
S602.源CU向终端设备发送第一消息。S602. The source CU sends a first message to the terminal device.
本实施例中,源CU在步骤S504中向终端设备发送第一消息,相应的,终端设备在步骤S504中接收该第一消息。In this embodiment, the source CU sends a first message to the terminal device in step S504, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message in step S504.
S603.终端设备忽略或删除切换配置信息。S603. The terminal device ignores or deletes the switching configuration information.
本实施例中,终端设备在接收指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息或确定未接收到第二消息时,该终端设备确定忽略或删除在步骤S602接收的切换配置信息。In this embodiment, when the terminal device receives indication information indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information or determines that the second message is not received, the terminal device determines to ignore or delete the switching configuration information received in step S602.
具体地,源CU向终端设备发送指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息。其中,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且能够基于源CU的调度(例如源CU不下发第二消息,或源CU发送指示信息以取消小区切换等)确定忽略或删除该切换配置信息,即该终端设备能够基于网络设备的调度确定不执行小区切换,以避免小区切换失败。Specifically, the source CU sends an indication message to the terminal device indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information. The terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered by the second message in advance, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the source CU (for example, the source CU does not send the second message, or the source CU sends an indication message to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid the failure of the cell switching.
可选地,源CU还可以通过其它方式隐式指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消,例如该源CU(在预设时长内)不发送该第二消息。Optionally, the source CU may also implicitly indicate cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information in other ways, for example, the source CU does not send the second message (within a preset time period).
需要说明的是,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程,或,该切换配置信息为基于测量事件触发的CHO配置信息。其中,在该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的情况下,步骤S601和步骤S602的实现过程可以参考前述图4所示步骤S401至步骤S402的实现过程,并实现相应的技术效果,此处不做赘述。It should be noted that the handover configuration information is used for the cell handover process triggered by the second message, or the handover configuration information is CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event. Wherein, in the case where the handover configuration information is used for the cell handover process triggered by the second message, the implementation process of step S601 and step S602 can refer to the implementation process of step S401 to step S402 shown in the aforementioned FIG. 4, and achieve the corresponding technical effect, which will not be described in detail here.
基于图6所示技术方案,终端设备在步骤S602中接收包括N个小区的切换配置的第一消息,该终端设备在步骤S603中确定未接收到第二消息(该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程)或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息。相比于终端设备接收携带有目标小区的配置信息的切换消息时触发小区切换的实现方式,终端设备可以提前获取用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程的切换配置信息,并且能够基于网络设备的调度(例如网络设备不下发第二消息,或网络设备发送指示信息以取消小区切换等)确定忽略或删除该切换配置信息,即该终端设备能够基于网络设备的调度确定不执行小区切换,以避免小区切换失败。Based on the technical solution shown in FIG6 , the terminal device receives a first message including the switching configuration of N cells in step S602, and the terminal device determines in step S603 that the second message (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) has not been received or determines that the indication information indicating the cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information has been received, and then ignores or deletes the switching configuration information. Compared with the implementation method in which the cell switching is triggered when the terminal device receives a switching message carrying the configuration information of the target cell, the terminal device can obtain the switching configuration information for the cell switching process triggered based on the second message in advance, and can determine to ignore or delete the switching configuration information based on the scheduling of the network device (for example, the network device does not send the second message, or the network device sends the indication information to cancel the cell switching, etc.), that is, the terminal device can determine not to perform the cell switching based on the scheduling of the network device to avoid the failure of the cell switching.
由上述图4至图6所示实现方式可知,上述技术方案能够适用于在终端设备连接的源DU所在的IAB节点发生跨CU迁移的场景。对于源CU而言,目标DU下的N个小区激活(或目标DU已获取终端设备的UE上下文配置)的时刻与终端设备获得N个小区的切换配置信息的时刻可能存在多种关系。It can be seen from the implementation methods shown in Figures 4 to 6 above that the above technical solution can be applied to the scenario where cross-CU migration occurs at the IAB node where the source DU connected to the terminal device is located. For the source CU, there may be multiple relationships between the moment when the N cells under the target DU are activated (or the target DU has obtained the UE context configuration of the terminal device) and the moment when the terminal device obtains the switching configuration information of the N cells.
例如,前者发生的时刻可以位于后者发生的时刻之前(如前述方式A),下面将结合图7所示示例在图2b所示场景中对该情况进行示例性说明。
For example, the moment when the former occurs may be before the moment when the latter occurs (such as the aforementioned method A). This situation will be exemplarily described in the scenario shown in FIG. 2 b in combination with the example shown in FIG. 7 .
又如,前者发生的时刻可以位于后者发生的时刻之后(如前述方式B和方式C),下面将结合图8和图9所示示例在图2b所示场景中对该情况进行示例性说明。For another example, the time when the former occurs may be after the time when the latter occurs (such as the aforementioned method B and method C). This situation will be exemplified in the scenario shown in FIG. 2 b in combination with the examples shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 .
应理解,在下述图7至图9实施例中,终端设备记为UE,源CU记为CU1,目标CU记为CU2,源DU为DU3a且目标DU为DU3b为例进行说明。It should be understood that in the embodiments of Figures 7 to 9 below, the terminal device is recorded as UE, the source CU is recorded as CU1, the target CU is recorded as CU2, the source DU is DU3a and the target DU is DU3b for illustration.
请参阅图7,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
1.CU2向IAB节点发送F1连接响应消息,相应的,IAB节点在该步骤中接收来自CU2的F1连接响应消息。1. CU2 sends an F1 connection response message to the IAB node. Correspondingly, the IAB node receives the F1 connection response message from CU2 in this step.
在步骤1中,DU3b与CU2的F1-C接口建立完毕,CU2向DU3b下发F1SETUP RESPONSE消息。In step 1, the F1-C interface between DU3b and CU2 is established, and CU2 sends an F1SETUP RESPONSE message to DU3b.
2.CU2向CU1发送第三指示信息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自CU2的第三指示信息。2. CU2 sends third indication information to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives the third indication information from CU2 in this step.
在步骤2中,CU2告知CU1,DU3b已准备就绪,可以为UE发送切换请求了(此处不局限于CHO切换请求)。In step 2, CU2 informs CU1 that DU3b is ready to send a handover request for the UE (not limited to a CHO handover request).
3.UE向CU1发送测量报告,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自UE的测量报告。3. The UE sends a measurement report to CU1. Accordingly, CU1 receives the measurement report from the UE in this step.
在步骤3中,CU1接收UE的测量报告。此步骤之所以是可选的,是因为DU3b与DU3a是同一个实体DU下的逻辑DU,DU3b下的小区与DU3a下小区可能存在对应关系,在这种情况下,UE的目标小区可以直接指定,不需要进行测量。In step 3, CU1 receives the measurement report from the UE. This step is optional because DU3b and DU3a are logical DUs under the same physical DU, and the cells under DU3b may correspond to the cells under DU3a. In this case, the target cell of the UE can be directly specified without measurement.
可选地,步骤3为可选步骤。Optionally, step 3 is an optional step.
4.CU1向CU2发送切换请求消息,相应的,CU2在该步骤中接收来自CU1的切换请求消息。4. CU1 sends a switching request message to CU2. Correspondingly, CU2 receives the switching request message from CU1 in this step.
5.CU2准入控制。5.CU2 admission control.
6.CU2向CU1发送切换响应消息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自CU2的切换响应消息。6. CU2 sends a handover response message to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives a handover response message from CU2 in this step.
步骤4~6为CU1与CU2之间进行UE的CHO切换准备过程。Steps 4 to 6 are the CHO handover preparation process of the UE between CU1 and CU2.
7.CU1向UE发送第一消息,相应的,UE在该步骤中接收来自CU1的第一消息。7. CU1 sends a first message to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
在步骤7中,CU1向UE发送第一消息,该第一消息可以为RRC消息(可以携带在CHO切换命令消息中)。可选的,该RRC消息携带以下至少一种信息:In step 7, CU1 sends a first message to the UE, where the first message may be an RRC message (may be carried in a CHO handover command message). Optionally, the RRC message carries at least one of the following information:
1)告知UE本次CHO将以广播的方式触发;和/或1) Inform the UE that this CHO will be triggered by broadcast; and/or
2)DU3b与DU3a下小区如果存在对应关系,直接指定每个UE在DU3b下的唯一目标小区。2) If there is a corresponding relationship between the cells under DU3b and DU3a, directly specify a unique target cell for each UE under DU3b.
这里的1)包含两层信息,首先,告知UE本次CHO将是被触发执行的,与传统的基于自行判断的CHO是不同的;其次,告知UE本次CHO将以广播的方式触发,而不是单播触发。上述两层信息可能不会同时出现,在撰写权要时需要体现出层次性。Here, 1) contains two layers of information. First, it informs the UE that this CHO will be triggered, which is different from the traditional CHO based on self-judgment. Second, it informs the UE that this CHO will be triggered by broadcast, not unicast. The above two layers of information may not appear at the same time, and the hierarchy needs to be reflected when writing the authority.
8.UE监听。8.UE monitoring.
UE收到步骤7的RRC消息后,在所有可能出现的PF和PO上监听PDCCH。换言之,步骤7还可选地具有指示UE在所有可能出现的PF和PO上监听PDCCH的作用。After receiving the RRC message in step 7, the UE monitors the PDCCH on all possible PFs and POs. In other words, step 7 may also optionally instruct the UE to monitor the PDCCH on all possible PFs and POs.
9.IAB节点向CU1发送测量报告,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自IAB节点的测量报告。9. The IAB node sends a measurement report to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives the measurement report from the IAB node in this step.
10.CU1判断是否需要执行MT切换。10. CU1 determines whether MT switching needs to be performed.
在步骤9~10中,CU1根据MT3的测量报告,判断MT3达到切换条件。In steps 9 to 10, CU1 determines that MT3 meets the switching condition based on the measurement report of MT3.
可选地,该步骤9~10为可选步骤。Optionally, steps 9 to 10 are optional steps.
11.CU1向UE发送指示取消切换的指示信息,相应的,UE在该步骤中接收来自CU1的指示取消切换的指示信息。11. CU1 sends indication information indicating the cancellation of switching to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives indication information indicating the cancellation of switching from CU1 in this step.
在步骤11中,如果MT3始终没有达到切换条件,此时认为full migration可能不会执行了,网络可以向UE发送指示信息(例如该指示信息承载于RRC消息),告知本次CHO取消,UE删除之前CHO切换命令中的配置。In step 11, if MT3 still does not meet the switching conditions, it is considered that full migration may not be executed. The network can send an indication message to the UE (for example, the indication message is carried in an RRC message) to inform the UE that the CHO is cancelled and the UE deletes the configuration in the previous CHO switching command.
12.CU1控制IAB节点发送第二消息,且第二消息中的第一信息承载于short messgae字段。相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的第二消息。12. CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, and the first information in the second message is carried in the short message field. Correspondingly, the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
在步骤12中,CU1通过DU3a向UE广播使用P-RNTI加扰的DCI,在short message字段指示group CHO执行。In step 12, CU1 broadcasts DCI encrypted with P-RNTI to UE via DU3a, indicating group CHO execution in the short message field.
13.CU1控制IAB节点发送short messgae字段,该short messgae字段用于指示PO的时域位置。
相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的承载于DCI的short messgae字段。13. CU1 controls the IAB node to send the short message field, which is used to indicate the time domain position of PO. Correspondingly, in this step, the UE receives the short message field carried in the DCI from CU1 through the IAB node.
14.CU1控制IAB节点发送第二消息,该第二消息中的第一信息承载于PO。相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的第二消息。14. CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, in which the first information is carried in the PO. Correspondingly, in this step, the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node.
CU1在步骤13中通过DU3a向UE广播使用P-RNTI加扰的DCI,在short message字段指示系统信息更新,然后CU1在步骤14中在更新的系统消息中指示group CHO执行。CU1 broadcasts DCI encrypted with P-RNTI to UE via DU3a in step 13, indicating system information update in the short message field, and then CU1 instructs group CHO execution in the updated system message in step 14.
可以理解的是,广播的方案使得DU3a下的所有的UE都能够收到,可以利用short message字段的预留bit指示group CHO的执行,或通过paging触发UE接收系统消息更新后,在新的系统消息中指示group CHO执行。It can be understood that the broadcast scheme enables all UEs under DU3a to receive the message, and the reserved bit of the short message field can be used to indicate the execution of group CHO, or after the UE receives the system message update through paging, the group CHO execution can be indicated in the new system message.
另外需要说明的是,在步骤9~10中,MT3可能已经达到切换条件,但此处不对MT3切换与步骤12~14的执行顺序加以限定,虽然根据full nested和gradual bottom-up的流程,需要在MT3切换之前进行UE的切换,但是,该实现场景并不局限在full nested/gradual bottom-up/gradual top-down这三种流程当中,也可能出现“DU3b与CU2建立跨拓扑F1接口——MT3切换——DU3a与CU1建立跨拓扑F1接口、DU3b与CU2的F1接口从跨拓扑迁移到同拓扑”,此时,也可能MT3先发生切换,再指示UE执行CHO。总之,步骤11~12可能在MT3切换前,也可能在MT3切换后,只要DU3a与CU1之间的F1连接、DU3b与CU2之间的F1连接存在就行。It should also be noted that in steps 9-10, MT3 may have reached the switching condition, but the execution order of MT3 switching and steps 12-14 is not limited here. Although according to the full nested and gradual bottom-up processes, the UE needs to be switched before MT3 switching, but the implementation scenario is not limited to the three processes of full nested/gradual bottom-up/gradual top-down. It may also appear that "DU3b and CU2 establish a cross-topology F1 interface - MT3 switching - DU3a and CU1 establish a cross-topology F1 interface, and the F1 interface between DU3b and CU2 migrates from cross-topology to same topology". At this time, MT3 may switch first and then instruct UE to perform CHO. In short, steps 11-12 may be before MT3 switching or after MT3 switching, as long as the F1 connection between DU3a and CU1 and the F1 connection between DU3b and CU2 exist.
可以理解的是,在步骤12~14中,网络侧以广播的形式触发CHO执行,这是因为如果此时再以单播的形式指示CHO执行,CHO可能增益较小。CHO增益的来源是对UE提前配置,UE判断需要切换时直接执行,而考虑到UE可能无法自行判断,网络侧采用广播的形式下发,一次性给多个UE下发CHO执行的指示消息,以获得更多的增益。It is understandable that in steps 12 to 14, the network side triggers CHO execution in the form of broadcast, because if CHO execution is instructed in the form of unicast at this time, CHO may have a small gain. The source of CHO gain is the advance configuration of UE, and the UE directly executes when it determines that switching is required. Considering that the UE may not be able to judge by itself, the network side uses broadcast to send the CHO execution instruction message to multiple UEs at one time to obtain more gain.
15.UE与IAB节点之间执行小区切换。15. A cell handover is performed between the UE and the IAB node.
UE对DU3b下的目标小区发起随机接入。如果步骤7的2)存在,则UE直接接入指定的目标小区,否则UE根据对DU3b下小区的测量结果,选择目标小区接入。The UE initiates random access to the target cell under DU3b. If step 7 (2) exists, the UE directly accesses the designated target cell, otherwise the UE selects the target cell to access based on the measurement results of the cells under DU3b.
由图7所示实施例可知,本实施例给出了DU3b的F1-C接口先于UE的CHO配置下发的情况(适用于full migration的full nested和gradual bottom-up流程),此时,DU3b已准备就绪,DU3b下的小区可以在CHO切换命令中被配置为UE的潜在目标小区。其中,网络侧向UE发送广播消息触发CHO执行,减少了full migration流程的执行时间。并且,本实施例解决了在车载移动IAB场景中因UE与车载IAB节点无相对运动,使得UE无法自行判断CHO执行的问题,使能了车载移动IAB迁移时UE CHO的执行。As can be seen from the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , this embodiment provides a situation where the F1-C interface of DU3b is issued before the CHO configuration of the UE (applicable to the full nested and gradual bottom-up processes of full migration). At this time, DU3b is ready, and the cell under DU3b can be configured as a potential target cell of the UE in the CHO switching command. Among them, the network side sends a broadcast message to the UE to trigger the CHO execution, which reduces the execution time of the full migration process. In addition, this embodiment solves the problem that in the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB scenario, the UE cannot judge the CHO execution by itself because there is no relative motion between the UE and the vehicle-mounted IAB node, and enables the execution of UE CHO during the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB migration.
请参阅图8,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG8 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
1.CU1向CU2发送切换请求消息,相应的,CU2在该步骤中接收来自CU1的切换请求消息。1. CU1 sends a handover request message to CU2. Accordingly, CU2 receives the handover request message from CU1 in this step.
在步骤1中,CU1向CU2发送关于UE CHO的切换请求(HO REQUEST)消息,其中,DU3b下的目标小区标识对应于尚未激活的目标小区。由于DU3b与DU3a属于一个实体DU,DU3b下待激活小区的标识可能是预配置的,IAB-node3可将其告知CU1(将DU3b下待激活小区标识告知CU1的信令其他专利已保护),因此,CU1可在HO REQUEST中携带尚未激活的目标小区的标识,并告知CU2该目标小区是未激活的。In step 1, CU1 sends a handover request (HO REQUEST) message about UE CHO to CU2, in which the target cell identifier under DU3b corresponds to the target cell that has not been activated. Since DU3b and DU3a belong to the same entity DU, the identifier of the cell to be activated under DU3b may be pre-configured, and IAB-node3 may inform CU1 of it (the signaling of informing CU1 of the identifier of the cell to be activated under DU3b is protected by other patents). Therefore, CU1 may carry the identifier of the target cell that has not been activated in the HO REQUEST and inform CU2 that the target cell is not activated.
2.CU2准入控制。2.CU2 admission control.
在步骤2中,CU2进行准入控制,但由于与DU3b之间的F1接口尚未建立,不向DU3b进行UE上下文配置。In step 2, CU2 performs admission control, but does not perform UE context configuration for DU3b because the F1 interface with DU3b has not been established.
3.CU2向CU1发送切换响应消息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自CU2的切换响应消息。3. CU2 sends a handover response message to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives a handover response message from CU2 in this step.
4.CU1通过IAB节点向UE发送第一消息,相应的,UE在该步骤中接收来自CU1的第一消息。4. CU1 sends a first message to the UE through the IAB node. Correspondingly, the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
在步骤4中,与图7所示实施例中的步骤7大致相同。可选地,在步骤4中发送的第一消息若携带目标小区标识的情况下,该目标小区标识对应的目标小区是尚未激活的。In step 4, it is substantially the same as step 7 in the embodiment shown in Fig. 7. Optionally, if the first message sent in step 4 carries the target cell identifier, the target cell corresponding to the target cell identifier is not yet activated.
5.IAB节点中的MT执行切换。5. The MT in the IAB node performs the handover.
6.IAB节点中的DU与CU2建立F1连接。
6. The DU in the IAB node establishes an F1 connection with CU2.
在步骤6中,DU3b与CU2之间在CU2的拓扑下建立F1接口。当DU3b的F1接口建立好后,CU2根据步骤1中拿到的UE上下文,向DU3b配置UE上下文。In step 6, an F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU2 under the topology of CU2. After the F1 interface of DU3b is established, CU2 configures the UE context to DU3b according to the UE context obtained in step 1.
7.CU2向CU1发送第三指示信息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自CU2的第三指示信息。7. CU2 sends third indication information to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives the third indication information from CU2 in this step.
在步骤7中,在CU2向DU3b配置完UE上下文后,发送第三指示信息,以告知CU1,UE的CHO可以执行了。In step 7, after CU2 completes configuring the UE context to DU3b, it sends third indication information to inform CU1 that the CHO of the UE can be executed.
8.CU1控制IAB节点发送第二消息,且第二消息中的第一信息承载于short messgae字段。相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的第二消息。8. CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, and the first information in the second message is carried in the short message field. Correspondingly, the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
9.CU1控制IAB节点发送short messgae字段,该short messgae字段用于指示PO的时域位置。相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的承载于DCI的short messgae字段。9. CU1 controls the IAB node to send the short message field, which is used to indicate the time domain position of the PO. Correspondingly, the UE receives the short message field carried on the DCI from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
10.CU1控制IAB节点发送第二消息,该第二消息中的第一信息承载于PO。相应的,UE在该步骤中通过IAB节点接收来自CU1的第二消息。10. CU1 controls the IAB node to send a second message, in which the first information is carried in the PO. Correspondingly, the UE receives the second message from CU1 through the IAB node in this step.
步骤8至步骤10所示实现方式可以参考图7所示实现方式中步骤12至步骤14所示实现方式。The implementation shown in steps 8 to 10 may refer to the implementation shown in steps 12 to 14 in the implementation shown in FIG. 7 .
应理解,图8所示实现方式也能够支持图7所示实现方式中步骤11所示的取消切换配置的实现方式,其实现过程可以参考前述实施例。It should be understood that the implementation shown in FIG. 8 can also support the implementation of canceling the switching configuration shown in step 11 of the implementation shown in FIG. 7 , and the implementation process thereof can refer to the aforementioned embodiment.
11.UE检测到N个小区的任一广播消息。相应的,N个小区在该步骤中发送广播消息。11. The UE detects any broadcast message of the N cells. Accordingly, the N cells send broadcast messages in this step.
在步骤11中,UE检测到DU3b下的信号,则触发CHO执行。本实施例中,由于DU3b激活的时间较晚,且UE的CHO切换命令的下发早于DU3b的激活,因此可以允许一旦UE在检测到DU3b下的信号,就执行CHO的切换。In step 11, the UE detects the signal under DU3b, and triggers CHO execution. In this embodiment, since DU3b is activated later and the UE's CHO switching command is issued earlier than the activation of DU3b, it is allowed to perform CHO switching once the UE detects the signal under DU3b.
12.UE与IAB节点之间执行小区切换。12. A cell handover is performed between the UE and the IAB node.
步骤12所示实现方式可以参考图7所示实现方式中步骤15所示实现方式。The implementation shown in step 12 may refer to the implementation shown in step 15 in the implementation shown in FIG. 7 .
本实施例给出了UE的CHO配置下发先于DU3b的F1-C接口建立的情况(适用于full migration的gradual top-down流程),在gradual top-down中,DU3b的F1-C接口在几乎是在最后才建立的,如果想要拿到CHO的增益,则需要在MT3切换之前就下发UE的CHO切换命令,此时DU3b下的目标小区还没有激活,无法进行真正的切换准备流程。其中,网络侧向UE发送广播消息触发CHO执行,或当UE检测到DU3b的信号后触发CHO执行,减少了full migration流程的执行时间。并且,本实施例解决了在车载移动IAB场景中因UE与车载IAB节点无相对运动,使得UE无法自行判断CHO执行的问题,使能了车载移动IAB迁移时UE CHO的执行。This embodiment shows the situation that the UE's CHO configuration is sent before the establishment of the F1-C interface of DU3b (applicable to the gradual top-down process of full migration). In the gradual top-down, the F1-C interface of DU3b is established almost at the end. If you want to get the gain of CHO, you need to send the UE's CHO switching command before the MT3 switching. At this time, the target cell under DU3b has not been activated, and the real switching preparation process cannot be carried out. Among them, the network side sends a broadcast message to the UE to trigger the CHO execution, or the UE triggers the CHO execution when it detects the signal of DU3b, which reduces the execution time of the full migration process. In addition, this embodiment solves the problem that in the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB scenario, the UE cannot judge the CHO execution by itself because there is no relative motion between the UE and the vehicle-mounted IAB node, and enables the execution of UE CHO during the migration of the vehicle-mounted mobile IAB.
请参阅图9,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG9 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
1.IAB节点与CU1之间建立F1连接。1. An F1 connection is established between the IAB node and CU1.
在步骤1中,DU3b与CU1之间建立F1接口,但在CU1向DU3b发送的F1SETUP RESPONSE消息中。In step 1, the F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU1, but in the F1SETUP RESPONSE message sent by CU1 to DU3b.
可选的,不激活DU3b下的任何小区。此时DU3b下的小区不需要激活,这是因为DU3b与CU1建立的F1接口只是为了从CU1处接收per UE的底层配置信息,并不是真的准备接受UE切换至DU3b下,且如果后续步骤采用图8所示实施例中的步骤11,此时应当不激活DU3b下的N个小区。Optionally, do not activate any cell under DU3b. At this time, the cells under DU3b do not need to be activated, because the F1 interface established between DU3b and CU1 is only for receiving the underlying configuration information of per UE from CU1, and is not really ready to accept the UE switching to DU3b. If the subsequent steps adopt step 11 in the embodiment shown in Figure 8, the N cells under DU3b should not be activated at this time.
2.CU1向IAB节点请求第一配置信息,相应的,IAB节点在该步骤中接收来自CU1的请求。2. CU1 requests the IAB node for first configuration information. Accordingly, the IAB node receives the request from CU1 in this step.
在步骤2中,CU1通过F1AP向DU3b配置UE上下文,发送UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST消息。In step 2, CU1 configures the UE context to DU3b through F1AP and sends a UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message.
3.IAB节点向CU1发送第一配置信息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自IAB节点的第一配置信息。3. The IAB node sends the first configuration information to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives the first configuration information from the IAB node in this step.
在步骤3中,DU3b生成UE的底层配置信息(即第一配置信息),通过UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE消息发给CU1。In step 3, DU3b generates the underlying configuration information of the UE (i.e., the first configuration information) and sends it to CU1 through the UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE message.
4.CU1向CU2发送第一配置信息,相应的,CU2在该步骤中接收来自CU1的第一配置信息。4. CU1 sends the first configuration information to CU2. Accordingly, CU2 receives the first configuration information from CU1 in this step.
在步骤4中,CU1将DU3b的底层配置信息发送给CU2。因为CU2是DU3b最终要建立F1接口的CU,DU3b下UE的高层配置信息(即第二配置信息)需要由CU2生成。In step 4, CU1 sends the lower-level configuration information of DU3b to CU2. Because CU2 is the CU with which DU3b will eventually establish the F1 interface, the higher-level configuration information (ie, the second configuration information) of the UE under DU3b needs to be generated by CU2.
5.CU2向CU1发送N个小区的切换配置信息,相应的,CU1在该步骤中接收来自CU2的N个小区的切换配置信息。5. CU2 sends the handover configuration information of N cells to CU1. Correspondingly, CU1 receives the handover configuration information of N cells from CU2 in this step.
在步骤5中CU2将步骤4中收到的DU3b的底层配置信息与高层配置信息相结合,通过RRC Container
发给CU1。In step 5, CU2 combines the bottom layer configuration information of DU3b received in step 4 with the high layer configuration information and sends it to RRC Container Sent to CU1.
6.CU1向UE发送第一消息,相应的,UE在该步骤中接收来自CU1的第一消息。6. CU1 sends a first message to the UE. Accordingly, the UE receives the first message from CU1 in this step.
在步骤6中,CU1向UE发送RRC重配置消息(CHO切换命令),携带UE在目标小区下的完整协议栈配置信息。In step 6, CU1 sends an RRC reconfiguration message (CHO handover command) to the UE, carrying the complete protocol stack configuration information of the UE in the target cell.
7.IAB节点中的DU3b与CU1之间的F1连接释放。7. The F1 connection between DU3b and CU1 in the IAB node is released.
8.IAB节点中的MT执行切换。8. The MT in the IAB node performs the handover.
在步骤8中MT3切换至CU2下的目标小区。In step 8, MT3 switches to the target cell under CU2.
9.IAB节点中的DU3b与CU2建立F1连接。9. DU3b in the IAB node establishes an F1 connection with CU2.
在步骤9中,DU3b重新与CU2建立F1接口,并激活小区。In step 9, DU3b re-establishes the F1 interface with CU2 and activates the cell.
此后,UE、IAB节点、CU1和CU2执行图8所示和步骤7至步骤12。Thereafter, the UE, the IAB node, CU1 and CU2 execute steps 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 8 .
在传统的切换准备流程中,是源CU向目标CU发送HANDOVER REQUEST,然后目标CU向目标DU发送UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST,目标DU向目标CU返回UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE(携带底层配置),目标CU会把DU报上来的底层配置和它自己生成的高层配置组合后,在HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE消息中通过RRC Container返回给源CU,再由源CU向UE下发RRC重配置消息(切换命令),透传其中RRC Container中的信息。在本实施例中,由于DU3b无法与CU2直接建立F1接口,因此提出通过CU1作为中转站,使得DU3b将底层配置报给CU1后,再由CU1告知CU2。在图9所示实施例中,需要在MT3切换之前,让DU3b与CU1之间建立F1接口,通过DU3b与CU1之间的F1接口,以及CU1与CU2之间的接口(如XN接口),达到DU3b与CU2之间通信的目的。In the traditional handover preparation process, the source CU sends a HANDOVER REQUEST to the target CU, and then the target CU sends a UE CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST to the target DU. The target DU returns a UE CONTEXT SETUP RESPONSE (carrying the underlying configuration) to the target CU. The target CU combines the underlying configuration reported by the DU with the high-level configuration generated by itself, and returns it to the source CU through the RRC Container in the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE message. The source CU then sends an RRC reconfiguration message (handover command) to the UE, transparently transmitting the information in the RRC Container. In this embodiment, since DU3b cannot directly establish an F1 interface with CU2, it is proposed to use CU1 as a transfer station so that DU3b reports the underlying configuration to CU1, and then CU1 informs CU2. In the embodiment shown in FIG9 , it is necessary to establish an F1 interface between DU3b and CU1 before MT3 switching, so as to achieve communication between DU3b and CU2 through the F1 interface between DU3b and CU1 and the interface between CU1 and CU2 (such as the XN interface).
本实施例中,在MT3切换之前,让DU3b与CU1之间建立F1接口,通过DU3b与CU1之间的F1接口,以及CU1与CU2之间的接口(如XN接口),使得CU1能够获得UE在DU3b下完整的协议栈配置,进而能够向UE发送CHO切换命令。并且,本实施例解决了当DU3b没有与CU2建立F1接口时无法对UE配置在DU3b下完整协议栈的问题,使得在按照gradual top-down的方式执行IAB节点full migration的前提下能够执行UE CHO。In this embodiment, before MT3 switching, an F1 interface is established between DU3b and CU1. Through the F1 interface between DU3b and CU1, and the interface between CU1 and CU2 (such as the XN interface), CU1 can obtain the complete protocol stack configuration of the UE under DU3b, and then send a CHO switching command to the UE. In addition, this embodiment solves the problem that the UE cannot be configured with a complete protocol stack under DU3b when DU3b has not established an F1 interface with CU2, so that UE CHO can be performed under the premise of performing the full migration of the IAB node in a gradual top-down manner.
在IAB网络中,用于IAB节点中的DU进行通信的配置信息需要下发的时候一般需要通过IAB节点中的MT从宿主节点获取。然而,在IAB节点中的MT未及时获取第三配置信息的情况下(例如MT和第一DU分别连接至不同的CU进行通信的情况,又如MT和第一DU均切换至同一CU但是MT的切换时机晚于第一DU的切换时机的情况等),将有可能导致IAB节点中的DU无法正常通信的问题。下面将通过本申请提供的图10和图11及相关实施例,以解决该问题。In the IAB network, when the configuration information for the DU in the IAB node to communicate needs to be sent down, it is generally necessary to obtain it from the host node through the MT in the IAB node. However, if the MT in the IAB node fails to obtain the third configuration information in time (for example, the MT and the first DU are respectively connected to different CUs for communication, or the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), it may cause the DU in the IAB node to fail to communicate normally. The following will use Figures 10 and 11 and related embodiments provided by this application to solve this problem.
请参阅图10,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG. 10 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
S1001.第一CU确定第三配置信息。S1001. The first CU determines third configuration information.
本实施例中,第一CU在步骤S1001中确定第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括第一DU的第三配置信息;其中,该第一DU位于IAB节点,该IAB节点还包括第二DU和MT。In this embodiment, the first CU determines third configuration information in step S1001, where the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first DU; wherein the first DU is located in an IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and an MT.
S1002.第一CU向IAB节点发送第三配置信息。S1002. The first CU sends third configuration information to the IAB node.
本实施例中,第一CU在步骤S1001中确定第三配置信息之后,该第一CU在步骤S1002中向IAB节点发送该第三配置信息,相应的,该IAB节点在步骤S1002中接收该第三配置信息。In this embodiment, after the first CU determines the third configuration information in step S1001, the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node in step S1002, and correspondingly, the IAB node receives the third configuration information in step S1002.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一CU在步骤S1002中发送的第三配置信息承载于F1应用协议(F1application protocol,F1AP)消息,或,第一CU在步骤S1002中发送的第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。具体地,第一CU可以通过多种方式向该IAB节点下发第三配置信息。其中,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中第二DU与第一CU之间的F1连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该F1连接上的F1AP消息。或者,第三配置信息可以通过IAB节点中MT与第一CU之间的RRC连接传输,即该第三配置信息可以承载于该RRC连接上的RRC消息。In a possible implementation, the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 is carried in an F1 application protocol (F1AP) message, or the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 is carried in an RRC message. Specifically, the first CU can send the third configuration information to the IAB node in a variety of ways. Among them, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the F1 connection between the second DU and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the F1AP message on the F1 connection. Alternatively, the third configuration information can be transmitted through the RRC connection between the MT and the first CU in the IAB node, that is, the third configuration information can be carried in the RRC message on the RRC connection.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一CU在步骤S1002中发送的第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识(new radio cell global identifier,NCGI),用于确定NCGI的CU标识,或,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识
(physical cell identifier,PCI)。In one possible implementation, the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 includes at least one of the following: a new radio cell global identifier (NCGI), a CU identifier for determining the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish an encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier of a cell in the first DU. (physical cell identifier, PCI).
可选地,第一CU在步骤S1002中发送的第三配置信息可以包括该第一DU与其它通信节点(例如CU或者其它的IAB节点或者终端设备等)的配置信息,该配置信息可以包括上述NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,PCI,或者是其他的配置信息,此处不做限定。Optionally, the third configuration information sent by the first CU in step S1002 may include configuration information of the first DU and other communication nodes (such as CU or other IAB nodes or terminal devices, etc.), and the configuration information may include the above-mentioned NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of NCGI, PCI, or other configuration information, which is not limited here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一CU在步骤S1002中向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息之后,该方法还包括:第一CU接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第二DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令,或用于指示第一DU已发送基于该第三配置信息确定的第三消息。具体地,第一DU在基于该第三配置信息能够进行通信的情况下,该第一DU还可以向第一CU发送指示信息,以使得该第一CU明确该第一DU已生效该第三配置信息,后续该第一CU可以基于该第三配置信息调度该第一DU和/或与该第一DU连接的终端设备。In a possible implementation, after the first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node in step S1002, the method further includes: the first CU receives fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to indicate that the first CU sends a switching command to the terminal device connected to the second DU, or to indicate that the first DU has sent a third message determined based on the third configuration information. Specifically, when the first DU is able to communicate based on the third configuration information, the first DU may also send indication information to the first CU so that the first CU knows that the third configuration information has taken effect on the first DU, and the first CU may subsequently schedule the first DU and/or the terminal device connected to the first DU based on the third configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三消息包括该第一DU向终端设备发送的同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block,SS/PBCH block)(可以简称为SS/PBCH块或SSB),或,该第一DU向其它CU发送的F1连接建立请求消息。In one possible implementation, the third message includes a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel PBCH block (SS/PBCH block) (which may be referred to as SS/PBCH block or SSB for short) sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
可选地,第三消息除了上述SSB之外,还可以包括该第一DU与下级通信节点(例如终端设备或者其它的IAB节点)的其它消息。Optionally, in addition to the above-mentioned SSB, the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the lower-level communication node (such as a terminal device or other IAB node).
可选地,第三消息除了上述F1连接建立请求消息之外,还可以包括其它该第一DU与上级通信节点(例如CU或者其它的IAB节点)的其它消息,此处不做限定。Optionally, in addition to the above-mentioned F1 connection establishment request message, the third message may also include other messages between the first DU and the upper-level communication node (such as CU or other IAB nodes), which is not limited here.
示例性的,下面将通过一些实现示例对第三配置信息可能包含的信息进行介绍。Exemplarily, the information that may be included in the third configuration information will be introduced below through some implementation examples.
在第三配置信息包括NCGI或NCGI的CU标识的实现示例中。NCGI用于在全球范围内唯一的标识一个小区,可携带在DU广播的系统消息块1(System Information Block 1,SIB1)消息中被UE接收,NCGI是由F1锚点CU的gNB ID和DU下小区的cell ID拼接而成,DU3b的cell ID是预配置给IAB-node3的,因此当确定DU3b的F1锚点CU后,就可以确定DU3b下的小区激活后的NCGI了。在partial migration中,由于IAB-DU没有更换过F1锚点CU,因此NCGI是不会变化的,而引入full migration后,需要考虑DU3b下小区的NCGI变更问题,本实施例将其拓展到了MT的CHO场景或DU与MT迁移解耦的场景。In the implementation example where the third configuration information includes NCGI or the CU identifier of NCGI. NCGI is used to uniquely identify a cell globally and can be carried in the System Information Block 1 (SIB1) message broadcast by the DU and received by the UE. NCGI is composed of the gNB ID of the F1 anchor CU and the cell ID of the cell under the DU. The cell ID of DU3b is pre-configured to IAB-node3. Therefore, when the F1 anchor CU of DU3b is determined, the NCGI of the cell under DU3b after activation can be determined. In partial migration, since the IAB-DU has not replaced the F1 anchor CU, the NCGI will not change. After the introduction of full migration, the NCGI change of the cell under DU3b needs to be considered. This embodiment extends it to the CHO scenario of MT or the scenario where DU and MT migration are decoupled.
在第三配置信息包括PCI的实现示例中。PCI的含义为物理小区标识,用于区分不同小区的物理资源(如:SSB资源),例如NR中可用的PCI为1008个,远小于全球NR小区个数,因此PCI需要在一定程度上复用。为了避免邻区干扰,邻区的PCI需要不同。在网络规划时,IAB小区与其他小区原本不相邻,所以可能用了相同的PCI,但由于移动,变成了邻区,这时会有冲突,此时IAB下的小区需要更换PCI,更换的方式是启动一个新的DU(DU3b),使用新的PCI,再把UE从DU3a切换到DU3b下。In the implementation example where the third configuration information includes PCI. The meaning of PCI is physical cell identifier, which is used to distinguish physical resources of different cells (such as SSB resources). For example, the number of PCIs available in NR is 1008, which is much smaller than the number of NR cells in the world, so PCI needs to be reused to a certain extent. In order to avoid interference between neighboring cells, the PCIs of neighboring cells need to be different. During network planning, the IAB cell was not originally adjacent to other cells, so the same PCI may have been used, but due to mobility, it became a neighboring cell. At this time, there will be a conflict. At this time, the cell under IAB needs to change the PCI. The replacement method is to start a new DU (DU3b), use the new PCI, and then switch the UE from DU3a to DU3b.
在第三配置信息包括第一密钥的实现示例中。在IAB-DU与donor-CU进行F1接口上的通信时,需要对F1接口的数据进行安全加密,其安全密钥(Kiab)是根据安全算法计算生成的,算法需要3个输入参数:IAB-DU的IP地址、donor-CU的IP地址、donor-CU的Key(KgNB)(该donor-CU的Key或该安全密钥即为第一密钥)。In the implementation example where the third configuration information includes the first key. When the IAB-DU communicates with the donor-CU on the F1 interface, the data on the F1 interface needs to be securely encrypted, and its security key (Kiab) is calculated and generated according to the security algorithm, which requires three input parameters: the IP address of the IAB-DU, the IP address of the donor-CU, and the Key of the donor-CU (KgNB) (the Key of the donor-CU or the security key is the first key).
基于图10所示技术方案,第一CU与IAB节点存在通信连接的情况下(例如第一CU与IAB节点中的MT存在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接和/或第一CU与IAB节点中的第二DU存在F1连接的情况下),第一CU可以向该IAB节点发送第一DU(即除了第二DU之外的其他DU)的第三配置信息,使得第一DU能够基于该第三配置信息进行通信。其中,IAB节点中的MT无需再次通过RRC连接接收来自该第一CU的配置信息,即可使得IAB节点中的第一DU能够获取该第三配置信息并基于该第三配置信息进行通信。从而,在IAB节点中的MT无法及时从第一CU获取配置信息的情况下(例如MT和第一DU分别连接至不同的CU进行通信的情况,又如MT和第一DU均切换至同一CU但是MT的切换时机晚于第一DU的切换时机的情况等),能够使能第一DU基于该第三配置信息进行通信,以避免该第一DU由于缺少该第三配置信息而导致无法通信的情况出现。Based on the technical solution shown in FIG. 10 , when there is a communication connection between the first CU and the IAB node (for example, there is a radio resource control (RRC) connection between the first CU and the MT in the IAB node and/or there is an F1 connection between the first CU and the second DU in the IAB node), the first CU can send the third configuration information of the first DU (i.e., other DUs except the second DU) to the IAB node, so that the first DU can communicate based on the third configuration information. Among them, the MT in the IAB node does not need to receive the configuration information from the first CU again through the RRC connection, so that the first DU in the IAB node can obtain the third configuration information and communicate based on the third configuration information. Therefore, in the case where the MT in the IAB node cannot obtain the configuration information from the first CU in time (for example, the case where the MT and the first DU are connected to different CUs for communication, and the case where the MT and the first DU are switched to the same CU but the switching timing of the MT is later than the switching timing of the first DU, etc.), the first DU can be enabled to communicate based on the third configuration information to avoid the situation where the first DU cannot communicate due to the lack of the third configuration information.
作为图10所示技术方案的一种实现示例,下面将对图11所示实现方式进行说明。在图11所示实施例中,考虑了IAB节点中的MT被配置了CHO的场景,或IAB节点中的MT与DU的迁移解耦的场景。本实施例的核心思想是将第一DU在第二CU下所需的信息(如:PCI,NCGI,KgNB)提前下发,当IAB-MT
或IAB-DU确定第二CU时,或IAB-node检测到PCI冲突时,IAB-DU确定使用该第二CU下对应的信息。对于基于PCI冲突触发的场景,第一CU与第二CU可能相同。As an implementation example of the technical solution shown in FIG10, the implementation method shown in FIG11 is described below. In the embodiment shown in FIG11, the scenario where the MT in the IAB node is configured with CHO or the scenario where the MT in the IAB node is decoupled from the migration of the DU is considered. The core idea of this embodiment is to send the information required by the first DU under the second CU (such as PCI, NCGI, KgNB) in advance. When the IAB-DU determines the second CU or the IAB-node detects a PCI conflict, the IAB-DU determines to use the corresponding information under the second CU. For a scenario triggered based on a PCI conflict, the first CU and the second CU may be the same.
请参阅图11,为本申请提供的通信方法的一个实现示意图,该方法包括如下步骤。Please refer to FIG. 11 , which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication method provided in the present application. The method includes the following steps.
1.第一CU向IAB节点发送第三配置信息,相应的,IAB节点在该步骤中接收来自第一的第三配置信息。1. The first CU sends the third configuration information to the IAB node. Correspondingly, the IAB node receives the third configuration information from the first CU in this step.
在步骤1中,在IAB节点中的MT的RRC消息或第二DU的F1AP消息中将(至少一个)第一DU在多个潜在的第二CU下所需的信息(如:NCGI、KgNB、PCI)预先告知该IAB节点。该RRC消息可能为MT3的CHO切换命令。需要说明的是,对于PCI信息,通常不需要来自于另一个CU,只要该PCI是与邻区不冲突的PCI即可。In step 1, the IAB node is informed in advance of the information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) required by (at least one) first DU under multiple potential second CUs in the RRC message of the MT in the IAB node or the F1AP message of the second DU. The RRC message may be a CHO switching command of MT3. It should be noted that the PCI information usually does not need to come from another CU, as long as the PCI is a PCI that does not conflict with the neighboring area.
其中,该第三配置信息的具体实现过程可以参考前述图10所示实施例的描述,此处不做赘述。Among them, the specific implementation process of the third configuration information can refer to the description of the embodiment shown in the aforementioned Figure 10, and will not be repeated here.
2.IAB节点确定触发事件,该触发事件用于触发生效第三配置信息。2. The IAB node determines a trigger event, where the trigger event is used to trigger the effectiveness of the third configuration information.
本实施例中,IAB节点在确定触发事件发生的情况下,该IAB节点中的第一DU确定生效该第三配置信息,即该IAB节点中的第一DU执行步骤3和/或步骤4。In this embodiment, when the IAB node determines that the triggering event occurs, the first DU in the IAB node determines to take the third configuration information into effect, that is, the first DU in the IAB node executes step 3 and/or step 4.
可选地,在步骤2中,该触发事件可以包括以下至少一项:Optionally, in step 2, the triggering event may include at least one of the following:
IAB节点中的MT满足切换条件且需要切换至第二CU时,IAB节点中的第一DU确定建立F1接口的CU为第二CU,或IAB节点中检测到第一DU的小区PCI与附近小区PCI发生冲突。When the MT in the IAB node meets the switching condition and needs to switch to the second CU, the first DU in the IAB node determines that the CU establishing the F1 interface is the second CU, or the IAB node detects that the cell PCI of the first DU conflicts with the PCI of a nearby cell.
应理解,在通信系统中,为了避免邻区干扰,邻区的PCI需要不同。在网络规划时,IAB小区与其他小区原本不相邻,所以可能用了相同的PCI,但由于移动,变成了邻区,这时会有冲突,此时IAB下的小区需要更换PCI,更换的方式是启动一个新的DU(如第一DU),使用新的PCI,再把UE从第二DU切换到第一DU下。因此检测到PCI冲突也可以作为第一DU下配置的生效条件。It should be understood that in the communication system, in order to avoid interference from neighboring cells, the PCI of neighboring cells needs to be different. During network planning, the IAB cell and other cells were not originally adjacent, so they may have used the same PCI, but due to mobility, they became neighboring cells, and there would be conflicts. At this time, the cell under IAB needs to change the PCI. The way to change is to start a new DU (such as the first DU), use the new PCI, and then switch the UE from the second DU to the first DU. Therefore, detecting a PCI conflict can also be used as a condition for the configuration under the first DU to take effect.
可选地,IAB节点中检测到第一DU的小区PCI与附近小区PCI发生冲突可以包括如下任一项实现过程,例如:IAB节点中的MT通过邻区测量,检测到了邻区的PCI,发现与第二DU下的小区PCI相同;或者可以是IAB节点中的第二DU通过实现的方式获知PCI冲突(如:当前PCI是在预配置的某一地理范围内可用的,第二DU基于定位设备发现自己移动到了当前PCI不可用的区域)。Optionally, the IAB node detects that the cell PCI of the first DU conflicts with the PCI of a nearby cell, which may include any of the following implementation processes, for example: the MT in the IAB node detects the PCI of the neighboring cell through neighboring cell measurement, and finds that it is the same as the cell PCI under the second DU; or the second DU in the IAB node obtains information about the PCI conflict through implementation (such as: the current PCI is available within a preconfigured geographical range, and the second DU finds that it has moved to an area where the current PCI is not available based on the positioning device).
3.IAB节点向终端设备发送第三消息,相应的,终端设备在该步骤中接收来自IAB节点的第三消息。3. The IAB node sends a third message to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third message from the IAB node in this step.
应理解,第三配置信息包括与终端设备之间进行通信的配置信息的情况下,IAB节点可以基于该配置信息在步骤3中向终端设备发送第三消息。It should be understood that, in the case where the third configuration information includes configuration information for communicating with the terminal device, the IAB node may send a third message to the terminal device in step 3 based on the configuration information.
4.IAB节点向第二CU发送第三消息,相应的,CU2在该步骤中接收来自IAB节点的第三消息。4. The IAB node sends a third message to the second CU. Accordingly, CU2 receives the third message from the IAB node in this step.
应理解,第三配置信息包括与CU之间进行通信的配置信息的情况下,IAB节点可以基于该配置信息在步骤3中向第二CU发送第三消息。It should be understood that, in the case where the third configuration information includes configuration information for communicating with the CU, the IAB node may send a third message to the second CU in step 3 based on the configuration information.
5.IAB节点向第一CU发送指示信息,相应的,第一CU在该步骤中接收来自IAB节点的指示信息。5. The IAB node sends indication information to the first CU. Correspondingly, the first CU receives indication information from the IAB node in this step.
步骤5为可选步骤。其中,当IAB节点确定第三配置信息生效后,IAB节点将会向第一CU发送指示信息(可通过MT的RRC消息承载或第二DU的F1AP消息承载或第一DU的F1AP消息承载,其中,通过DU3b的F1AP的方式只适用于DU3b与DU3a的F1锚点CU相同的场景,即上述PCI变更的场景),指示DU3b的配置已生效,或指示UE可以切到第一DU下。Step 5 is an optional step. When the IAB node determines that the third configuration information is effective, the IAB node will send an indication message to the first CU (which can be carried by the RRC message of the MT or the F1AP message of the second DU or the F1AP message of the first DU, wherein the method of using the F1AP of DU3b is only applicable to the scenario where the F1 anchor CU of DU3b and DU3a is the same, that is, the scenario where the PCI is changed above), indicating that the configuration of DU3b has taken effect, or indicating that the UE can be switched to the first DU.
本实施例中,将第一DU所需的第三配置信息(如:NCGI,KgNB,PCI)提前下发,当IAB节点中的MT或IAB节点中的第二DU确定与其它CU连接时,或当IAB节点检测到PCI冲突时,IAB节点的第一DU确定使用该目标CU下对应的信息。以使能当MT通过CHO切换或DU与MT的迁移解耦的场景,本实施例能够在这两种场景下让第一DU正确获取所需的配置信息(如:NCGI,KgNB,PCI)。In this embodiment, the third configuration information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) required by the first DU is sent in advance. When the MT in the IAB node or the second DU in the IAB node determines to connect to other CUs, or when the IAB node detects a PCI conflict, the first DU of the IAB node determines to use the corresponding information under the target CU. In order to enable the scenario where the MT is switched through CHO or the migration of the DU and the MT is decoupled, this embodiment can allow the first DU to correctly obtain the required configuration information (such as NCGI, KgNB, PCI) in these two scenarios.
上面从方法的角度对本申请进行说明,下面将对本申请提供的其他实施例进一步描述。The present application is described above from the perspective of method, and other embodiments provided by the present application will be further described below.
请参阅图12,为本申请提供的通信装置的一个实现示意图,该通信装置1200包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202。该通信装置1200可以实现上述方法实施例中通信装置(包括终端设备,源CU,目标CU,第一CU或IAB节点等)的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请实施例中,该通信装置1200可以是终端设备(或源CU,目标CU,第一CU或IAB节点等),也可以是终端设
备(或源CU,目标CU,第一CU或IAB节点等)内部的集成电路或者元件等,例如芯片。下文实施例以该通信装置1200为终端设备(或源CU,目标CU,第一CU或IAB节点等)为例进行说明。Please refer to Figure 12, which is a schematic diagram of an implementation of the communication device provided in the present application. The communication device 1200 includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202. The communication device 1200 can implement the functions of the communication device (including terminal equipment, source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.) in the above method embodiment, and thus can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiment. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device 1200 can be a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.), or it can be a terminal device An integrated circuit or component, such as a chip, inside a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.). The following embodiments are described by taking the communication device 1200 as a terminal device (or source CU, target CU, first CU or IAB node, etc.) as an example.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该收发单元1202用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该处理单元1201用于在该收发单元1202接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive a first message, the first message including switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the processing unit 1201 is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the transceiver unit 1202 receives the second message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,N个小区的任一广播信息。In one possible implementation, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information DCI of a physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by a paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI; information in a paging opportunity PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。In a possible implementation, the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on the second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner, the second message is a broadcast message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation, the value of N is 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为条件切换CHO配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the handover configuration information is conditional handover CHO configuration information.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中终端设备所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该收发单元1202用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数;该处理单元1201用于在确定未接收到第二消息(该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程)或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive a first message, and the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer; the processing unit 1201 is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that a second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程。In a possible implementation manner, the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该切换配置信息为基于测量事件触发的条件切换CHO配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the handover configuration information is conditional handover CHO configuration information triggered by a measurement event.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中源CU所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该处理单元1201用于确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;其中,N个小区位于目标DU;该收发单元1202用于通过接入回传一体化IAB节点向终端设备发送该第一消息。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the source CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine a first message, the first message includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the first message to the terminal device through an access backhaul integrated IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该目标DU位于该IAB节点。In a possible implementation manner, the target DU is located at the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于在该处理单元1201确定该目标DU与目标集中式单元CU已建立F1连接之后,向该目标CU发送该终端的切换请求消息;该收发单元1202还用于接收来自该目标CU的切换响应消息,该切换响应消息包括该切换配置信息。In one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a switching request message of the terminal to the target CU after the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target centralized unit CU; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive a switching response message from the target CU, and the switching response message includes the switching configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于向该终端设备发送该第二消息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is further configured to send the second message to the terminal device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,该收发单元1202向该终端设备发送该第二消息,包括:该处理单元1201确定该目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接;该处理单元1201确定该IAB节点中的移动终端MT将要切换至该目标CU;或,该处理单元1201确定接收来自该目标CU的指示允许该终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 sends the second message to the terminal device when at least one of the following is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU; the processing unit 1201 determines that the mobile terminal MT in the IAB node is about to switch to the target CU; or, the processing unit 1201 determines that receiving an indication from the target CU allows the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下任一项时,该收发单元1202发送该第一消息,包括:该处理单元1201确定该收发单元1202向该目标CU发送第一切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第一切换响应消息,该第一切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息;该处理单元1201确定该收发单元1202向该目标CU发送第二切换请求消息之后,接收来自该目标CU的第二切换响应消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;或,该处理单元1201确定该收发单元1202接收来自该目标DU的第一配置信息并向该目标CU发送该第一配置信息之后,接收来自该目标CU的N个小区的切换配置信息,且该N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 sends the first message when any of the following items is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 sends a first switching request message to the target CU, it receives a first switching response message from the target CU, and the first switching response message includes switching configuration information of N cells; the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 sends a second switching request message to the target CU, it receives a second switching response message from the target CU, and the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; or, the processing unit 1201 determines that after the transceiver unit 1202 receives the first configuration information from the target DU and sends the first configuration information to the target CU, it receives the switching configuration information of N cells from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。In a possible implementation, the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该确定单元具体用于基于来自该目标CU的第三指示信息确定该目标DU
与目标集中式单元CU已建立F1连接,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。In a possible implementation manner, the determining unit is specifically configured to determine the target DU based on the third indication information from the target CU. An F1 connection has been established with the target centralized unit CU, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息包括第一信息,该第一信息承载于以下任一项:寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,N个小区的任一广播信息。In one possible implementation, the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following: a short message field in the downlink control information DCI of a physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by a paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI; information in a paging opportunity PO; or any broadcast information of N cells.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一消息还包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,指示该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测该第二消息。In a possible implementation, the first message also includes at least one of the following: first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered based on the second message; or, second indication information, indicating that the second message is monitored on all POs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第二消息为广播消息。In a possible implementation manner, the second message is a broadcast message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,N的取值为1。In a possible implementation, the value of N is 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending indication information indicating cancellation of the cell handover process corresponding to the handover configuration information.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中目标CU所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该处理单元1201用于在确定与目标分布式单元DU已建立F1连接之后,确定第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,该目标DU包括N个小区,N为正整数;其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该收发单元1202用于向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the target CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information indicates that the terminal device performs cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202具体用于在该处理单元1201确定该目标DU已配置该终端设备的上下文之后,向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is specifically used to send the third indication information to the source CU after the processing unit 1201 determines that the target DU has been configured with the context of the terminal device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于接收来自源集中式单元CU的第二切换请求消息,该第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且N个小区为未激活的小区;其中,N个小区位于该目标DU;该收发单元1202还用于向该源CU发送第二切换响应消息,该第二切换响应消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息。In one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive a second switching request message from a source centralized unit CU, wherein the second switching request message includes the identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a second switching response message to the source CU, wherein the second switching response message includes the switching configuration information of the N cells.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于接收来自源集中式单元CU的该第一配置信息之后,向该源CU发送N个小区的切换配置信息,N个小区的切换配置信息包括该第一配置信息和第二配置信息。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is further used to send switching configuration information of N cells to the source centralized unit CU after receiving the first configuration information from the source CU, where the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,该第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。In a possible implementation, the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中第一CU所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该处理单元1201用于确定第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括第一集中式单元DU的第三配置信息;其中,该第一DU位于接入回传一体化IAB节点,该IAB节点还包括第二DU和移动终端MT;该收发单元1202用于向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the first CU in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes third configuration information of the first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at an access and backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1AP消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner, the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识NCGI,用于确定NCGI的CU标识,或,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识PCI。In one possible implementation, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, used to determine the CU identifier of the NCGI, or a first key for the first DU to establish encrypted communication with other CUs for an F1 connection, or a physical cell identifier PCI of a cell in the first DU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于接收第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第二DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to receive fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the second DU.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该装置1200为用于执行前述实施例中IAB节点所执行的方法时,该装置包括处理单元1201和收发单元1202;该收发单元1202用于接收第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括该第一DU的第三配置信息;该处理单元1201用于确定第三消息,该第三消息为基于该第三配置信息得到;该收发单元1202还用于发送第三消息。In one possible implementation, when the device 1200 is used to execute the method executed by the IAB node in the aforementioned embodiment, the device includes a processing unit 1201 and a transceiver unit 1202; the transceiver unit 1202 is used to receive third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the processing unit 1201 is used to determine a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send a third message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息承载于F1AP消息,或,该第三配置信息承载于RRC消息。In a possible implementation manner, the third configuration information is carried in an F1AP message, or the third configuration information is carried in an RRC message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三配置信息包括以下至少一项:新无线小区全球标识NCGI,用于确
定NCGI的CU标识,用于该第一DU建立与其它CU之间F1连接的加密通信的第一密钥,或,该第一DU中的小区的物理小区标识PCI。In a possible implementation manner, the third configuration information includes at least one of the following: a new wireless cell global identifier NCGI, which is used to identify The CU identifier of the specified NCGI is used for the first DU to establish a first key for encrypted communication of the F1 connection with other CUs, or the physical cell identifier PCI of the cell in the first DU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在满足以下至少一项时,该收发单元1202发送第三消息,包括:该处理单元1201确定满足小区切换执行条件,且该小区切换对应的目标小区位于该其它CU;该处理单元1201确定确定与该其它CU建立F1连接;或,该处理单元1201确定检测到该第一DU下任一小区的PCI与其它PCI发生冲突。In one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 sends a third message when at least one of the following items is met, including: the processing unit 1201 determines that the cell switching execution condition is met, and the target cell corresponding to the cell switching is located in the other CU; the processing unit 1201 determines to establish an F1 connection with the other CU; or the processing unit 1201 determines that the PCI of any cell under the first DU conflicts with other PCIs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元1202还用于向该第一CU发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一DU的第三配置信息已生效,或用于指示第一CU向第一DU连接的终端设备发送切换命令。In a possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1202 is also used to send fourth indication information to the first CU, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third configuration information of the first DU has taken effect, or to instruct the first CU to send a switching command to a terminal device connected to the first DU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该第三消息包括该第一DU向终端设备发送的SSB,或,该第一DU向其它CU发送的F1连接建立请求消息。In a possible implementation, the third message includes an SSB sent by the first DU to the terminal device, or an F1 connection establishment request message sent by the first DU to other CUs.
需要说明的是,上述通信装置1200的单元的信息执行过程等内容,具体可参见本申请前述所示的方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the information execution process and other contents of the units of the above-mentioned communication device 1200 can be specifically referred to the description in the method embodiment shown in the above-mentioned application, and will not be repeated here.
请参阅图13,为本申请提供的通信装置1300的另一种示意性结构图,通信装置1300至少包括输入输出接口1302。其中,通信装置1300可以为芯片或集成电路。Please refer to Fig. 13, which is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1300 provided in the present application. The communication device 1300 at least includes an input and output interface 1302. The communication device 1300 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
可选的,该通信装置还包括逻辑电路1301。Optionally, the communication device also includes a logic circuit 1301.
其中,图12所示收发单元1202可以为通信接口,该通信接口可以是图13中的输入输出接口1302,该输入输出接口1302可以包括输入接口和输出接口。或者,该通信接口也可以是收发电路,该收发电路可以包括输入接口电路和输出接口电路。The transceiver unit 1202 shown in Figure 12 may be a communication interface, which may be the input/output interface 1302 in Figure 13, which may include an input interface and an output interface. Alternatively, the communication interface may also be a transceiver circuit, which may include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
可选的,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中终端设备(或终端设备中的部件)的情况下,该输入输出接口1302用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该逻辑电路1301用于在该输入输出接口1302接收该第二消息之后,基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is a terminal device (or a component in a terminal device) in the aforementioned embodiment, the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive a first message, the first message including switching configuration information of N cells, N being a positive integer, wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; and the logic circuit 1301 is used to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information after the input-output interface 1302 receives the second message.
可选的,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中终端设备(或终端设备中的部件)的情况下,该输入输出接口1302用于接收第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数;该逻辑电路1301用于在确定未接收到第二消息(该第二消息用于触发该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程)或确定接收到指示该切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息之后,忽略或删除该切换配置信息。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is a terminal device (or a component in a terminal device) in the aforementioned embodiment, the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive a first message, which includes switching configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer; the logic circuit 1301 is used to ignore or delete the switching configuration information after determining that a second message is not received (the second message is used to trigger the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information) or determining that an indication message indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information is received.
可选地,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中源CU(或源CU中的部件)的情况下,该逻辑电路1301用于确定第一消息,该第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,N为正整数,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;其中,N个小区位于目标DU;该输入输出接口1302用于通过接入回传一体化IAB节点向终端设备发送该第一消息。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is the source CU (or a component in the source CU) in the aforementioned embodiment, the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a first message, which includes switching configuration information of N cells, N is a positive integer, and the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU; the input-output interface 1302 is used to send the first message to the terminal device through an access backhaul integrated IAB node.
可选地,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中目标CU(或目标CU中的部件)的情况下,该逻辑电路1301用于在确定与目标分布式单元DU已建立F1连接之后,确定第三指示信息,该第三指示信息指示终端设备基于该切换配置信息执行小区切换,该目标DU包括N个小区,N为正整数;其中,该切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;该输入输出接口1302用于向该源CU发送该第三指示信息。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is the target CU (or a component in the target CU) in the aforementioned embodiment, the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a third indication information after determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target distributed unit DU, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, and the target DU includes N cells, where N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; and the input-output interface 1302 is used to send the third indication information to the source CU.
可选地,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中第一CU(或第一CU中的部件)的情况下,该逻辑电路1301用于确定第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括第一集中式单元DU的第三配置信息;其中,该第一DU位于接入回传一体化IAB节点,该IAB节点还包括第二DU和移动终端MT;该输入输出接口1302用于向该IAB节点发送该第三配置信息。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is the first CU (or a component in the first CU) in the aforementioned embodiment, the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine the third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first centralized unit DU; wherein the first DU is located at the access and backhaul integrated IAB node, and the IAB node also includes a second DU and a mobile terminal MT; the input and output interface 1302 is used to send the third configuration information to the IAB node.
可选地,该通信装置1300为前述实施例中IAB节点(或IAB节点中的部件)的情况下,该输入输出接口1302用于接收第三配置信息,该第三配置信息包括该第一DU的第三配置信息;该逻辑电路1301用于确定第三消息,该第三消息为基于该第三配置信息得到;该输入输出接口1302还用于发送第三消息。Optionally, when the communication device 1300 is the IAB node (or a component in the IAB node) in the aforementioned embodiment, the input-output interface 1302 is used to receive third configuration information, and the third configuration information includes the third configuration information of the first DU; the logic circuit 1301 is used to determine a third message, and the third message is obtained based on the third configuration information; the input-output interface 1302 is also used to send a third message.
其中,逻辑电路1301和输入输出接口1302还可以执行任一实施例中网络设备执行的其他步骤并实
现对应的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The logic circuit 1301 and the input/output interface 1302 can also execute other steps executed by the network device in any embodiment and implement The corresponding beneficial effects are now omitted here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图12所示处理单元1201可以为图13中的逻辑电路1301。In a possible implementation, the processing unit 1201 shown in FIG. 12 may be the logic circuit 1301 in FIG. 13 .
可选的,逻辑电路1301可以是一个处理装置,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。其中,处理装置的功能可以部分或全部通过软件实现。Optionally, the logic circuit 1301 may be a processing device, and the functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software. The functions of the processing device may be partially or completely implemented by software.
可选的,处理装置可以包括存储器和处理器,其中,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行任意一个方法实施例中的相应处理和/或步骤。Optionally, the processing device may include a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor reads and executes the computer program stored in the memory to perform corresponding processing and/or steps in any one of the method embodiments.
可选地,处理装置可以仅包括处理器。用于存储计算机程序的存储器位于处理装置之外,处理器通过电路/电线与存储器连接,以读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序。其中,存储器和处理器可以集成在一起,或者也可以是物理上互相独立的。Alternatively, the processing device may include only a processor. A memory for storing a computer program is located outside the processing device, and the processor is connected to the memory via a circuit/wire to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory. The memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be physically independent of each other.
可选地,该处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片,或一个或多个集成电路。例如,处理装置可以是一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)、中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP)、微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其它集成芯片,或者上述芯片或者处理器的任意组合等。Optionally, the processing device may be one or more chips, or one or more integrated circuits. For example, the processing device may be one or more field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), system on chip (SoC), central processor unit (CPU), network processor (NP), digital signal processor (DSP), microcontroller unit (MCU), programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips, or any combination of the above chips or processors.
请参阅图14,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1400,该通信装置1400具体可以为上述实施例中的作为终端设备的通信装置。Please refer to FIG. 14 , which shows a communication device 1400 involved in the above embodiments provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1400 may specifically be a communication device as a terminal device in the above embodiments.
其中,该通信装置1400的一种可能的逻辑结构示意图,该通信装置1400可以包括但不限于至少一个处理器1401以及通信端口1402。Herein, a possible logical structure diagram of the communication device 1400 is shown. The communication device 1400 may include but is not limited to at least one processor 1401 and a communication port 1402 .
进一步可选的,该装置还可以包括存储器1403、总线1404中的至少一个,在本申请的实施例中,该至少一个处理器1401用于对通信装置1400的动作进行控制处理。Further optionally, the device may also include at least one of a memory 1403 and a bus 1404 . In an embodiment of the present application, the at least one processor 1401 is used to control and process the actions of the communication device 1400 .
此外,处理器1401可以是中央处理器单元,通用处理器,数字信号处理器,专用集成电路,现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。该处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。In addition, the processor 1401 can be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a transistor logic device, a hardware component or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor can also be a combination that implements a computing function, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and the like. Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,图14所示通信装置1400具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中终端设备所实现的步骤,并实现终端设备对应的技术效果,图14所示通信装置的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device 1400 shown in Figure 14 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the terminal device in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the terminal device. The specific implementation methods of the communication device shown in Figure 14 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
请参阅图15,为本申请的实施例提供的上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置1500的结构示意图,该通信装置1500具体可以为上述实施例中的作为网络设备(例如源CU,目标CU,第一CU,IAB节点等)的通信装置。其中,该通信装置的结构可以参考图15所示的结构。Please refer to FIG. 15, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device 1500 involved in the above embodiments provided in the embodiments of the present application. The communication device 1500 may specifically be a communication device as a network device (e.g., source CU, target CU, first CU, IAB node, etc.) in the above embodiments. The structure of the communication device may refer to the structure shown in FIG. 15.
通信装置1500包括至少一个处理器1511以及至少一个网络接口1514。进一步可选的,该通信装置还包括至少一个存储器1512、至少一个收发器1513和一个或多个天线1515。处理器1511、存储器1512、收发器1513和网络接口1514相连,例如通过总线相连,在本申请实施例中,该连接可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等,本实施例对此不做限定。天线1515与收发器1513相连。网络接口1514用于使得通信装置通过通信链路,与其它通信设备通信。例如网络接口1514可以包括通信装置与核心网设备之间的网络接口,例如S1接口,网络接口可以包括通信装置和其他通信装置(例如其他网络设备或者核心网设备)之间的网络接口,例如X2或者Xn接口。The communication device 1500 includes at least one processor 1511 and at least one network interface 1514. Further optionally, the communication device also includes at least one memory 1512, at least one transceiver 1513 and one or more antennas 1515. The processor 1511, the memory 1512, the transceiver 1513 and the network interface 1514 are connected, for example, through a bus. In an embodiment of the present application, the connection may include various interfaces, transmission lines or buses, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment. The antenna 1515 is connected to the transceiver 1513. The network interface 1514 is used to enable the communication device to communicate with other communication devices through a communication link. For example, the network interface 1514 may include a network interface between the communication device and the core network device, such as an S1 interface, and the network interface may include a network interface between the communication device and other communication devices (such as other network devices or core network devices), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
处理器1511主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持通信装置执行实施例中所描述的动作。通信装置可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用
于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图15中的处理器1511可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。该基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。该中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。The processor 1511 is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the communication device to perform the actions described in the embodiment. The communication device may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to The processor 1511 in FIG. 15 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processor. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the baseband processor and the central processor can also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as buses. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the terminal device can include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device can include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities. The various components of the terminal device can be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processor can also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data can be built into the processor, or it can be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1512可以是独立存在,与处理器1511相连。可选的,存储器1512可以和处理器1511集成在一起,例如集成在一个芯片之内。其中,存储器1512能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码,并由处理器1511来控制执行,被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1511的驱动程序。The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The memory 1512 can be independent and connected to the processor 1511. Optionally, the memory 1512 can be integrated with the processor 1511, for example, integrated into a chip. Among them, the memory 1512 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1511. The various types of computer program codes executed can also be regarded as drivers of the processor 1511.
图15仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储元件,或者为独立的存储元件,本申请实施例对此不做限定。FIG15 shows only one memory and one processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and multiple memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc. The memory may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor, i.e., an on-chip storage element, or an independent storage element, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
收发器1513可以用于支持通信装置与终端之间射频信号的接收或者发送,收发器1513可以与天线1515相连。收发器1513包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地,一个或多个天线1515可以接收射频信号,该收发器1513的接收机Rx用于从天线接收该射频信号,并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给该处理器1511,以便处理器1511对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理,例如解调处理和译码处理。此外,收发器1513中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1511接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号,并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号,并通过一个或多个天线1515发送该射频信号。具体地,接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号,该下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号,该上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。The transceiver 1513 can be used to support the reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device and the terminal, and the transceiver 1513 can be connected to the antenna 1515. The transceiver 1513 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, one or more antennas 1515 can receive radio frequency signals, and the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1513 is used to receive the radio frequency signal from the antenna, and convert the radio frequency signal into a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and provide the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to the processor 1511, so that the processor 1511 further processes the digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing. In addition, the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1513 is also used to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1511, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and send the radio frequency signal through one or more antennas 1515. Specifically, the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the RF signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, and the order of the down-mixing and analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable. The transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a RF signal, and the order of the up-mixing and digital-to-analog conversion processing is adjustable. The digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal can be collectively referred to as a digital signal.
收发器1513也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。The transceiver 1513 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc. Optionally, a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a receiving function may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device in the transceiver unit for implementing a sending function may be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
需要说明的是,图15所示通信装置1500具体可以用于实现前述方法实施例中网络设备所实现的步骤,并实现网络设备对应的技术效果,图15所示通信装置1500的具体实现方式,均可以参考前述方法实施例中的叙述,此处不再一一赘述。It should be noted that the communication device 1500 shown in Figure 15 can be specifically used to implement the steps implemented by the network equipment in the aforementioned method embodiment, and to achieve the corresponding technical effects of the network equipment. The specific implementation methods of the communication device 1500 shown in Figure 15 can refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment, and will not be repeated here one by one.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如前述实施例中终端设备可能的实现方式所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation manner of the terminal device in the aforementioned embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机执行指令的计算机可读存储介质,当计算机执行指令被处理器执行时,该处理器执行如前述实施例中网络设备(例如源CU,目标CU,第一CU,IAB节点等)可能的实现方式所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes the method described in the possible implementation method of the network device (e.g., source CU, target CU, first CU, IAB node, etc.) in the aforementioned embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品(或称计算机程序),当计算机程序产品被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述终端设备可能实现方式的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product (or computer program) storing one or more computers. When the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes the method of the possible implementation mode of the above-mentioned terminal device.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储一个或多个计算机的计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品被该处理器执行时,该处理器执行上述网络设备(例如源CU,目标CU,第一CU,IAB节点等)可能实现方式的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product storing one or more computers. When the computer program product is executed by the processor, the processor executes a method of possible implementation of the above-mentioned network device (such as a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.).
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述通信装置可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。在一种可能的设计中,该芯片系统还可以包括存储器,
存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述方法实施例中终端设备。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation of the above communication device. Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data to the at least one processor. In a possible design, the chip system may also include a memory, The memory is used to store the necessary program instructions and data of the communication device. The chip system can be composed of a chip, or can include a chip and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device can specifically be the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,用于支持通信装置实现上述通信装置可能的实现方式中所涉及的功能。可选的,所述芯片系统还包括接口电路,所述接口电路为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令和/或数据。在一种可能的设计中,芯片系统还可以包括存储器,存储器,用于保存该通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,其中,该通信装置具体可以为前述方法实施例中网络设备(例如源CU,目标CU,第一CU,IAB节点等)。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes at least one processor for supporting a communication device to implement the functions involved in the possible implementation methods of the above-mentioned communication device. Optionally, the chip system also includes an interface circuit, which provides program instructions and/or data for the at least one processor. In one possible design, the chip system may also include a memory, which is used to store the necessary program instructions and data for the communication device. The chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices, wherein the communication device may specifically be a network device (such as a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.) in the aforementioned method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述任一实施例中的终端设备和网络设备(包括源CU,目标CU,第一CU,IAB节点等至少一项)。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device and network device in any of the above embodiments (including at least one of a source CU, a target CU, a first CU, an IAB node, etc.).
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit. If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), a random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), a disk or an optical disk.
Claims (29)
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:接收第一消息,所述第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,所述N为正整数,其中,所述切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;receiving a first message, where the first message includes handover configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, wherein the handover configuration information is used for a cell handover process triggered by a second message;在接收所述第二消息之后,基于所述切换配置信息执行小区切换。After receiving the second message, a cell handover is performed based on the handover configuration information.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括第一信息,所述第一信息承载于以下任一项:The method according to claim 1, wherein the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following:寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;The short message field in the downlink control information DCI of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI;寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,The information in the pager PO; or,所述N个小区的任一广播信息。Any broadcast information of the N cells.
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the first message further includes at least one of the following:第一指示信息,指示所述切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测所述第二消息。The second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
- 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息为广播消息。The method according to claim 3 is characterized in that the second message is a broadcast message.
- 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N的取值为1。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the value of N is 1.
- 根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换配置信息为条件切换CHO配置信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the switching configuration information is conditional switching CHO configuration information.
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:确定第一消息,所述第一消息包括N个小区的切换配置信息,所述N为正整数,所述切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;其中,N个小区位于目标DU;Determine a first message, wherein the first message includes handover configuration information of N cells, where N is a positive integer, and the handover configuration information is used for a cell handover process triggered by the second message; wherein the N cells are located in a target DU;通过接入回传一体化IAB节点向终端设备发送所述第一消息。The first message is sent to the terminal device via the access backhaul integrated IAB node.
- 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标DU位于所述IAB节点。The method according to claim 7, characterized in that the target DU is located at the IAB node.
- 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that the method further comprises:在确定所述目标DU与目标集中式单元CU已建立F1连接之后,向所述目标CU发送所述终端的切换请求消息;After determining that the target DU has established an F1 connection with a target centralized unit CU, sending a handover request message of the terminal to the target CU;接收来自所述目标CU的切换响应消息,所述切换响应消息包括所述切换配置信息。A handover response message is received from the target CU, where the handover response message includes the handover configuration information.
- 根据权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9, characterized in that the method further comprises:向所述终端设备发送所述第二消息。Send the second message to the terminal device.
- 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,在满足以下至少一项时,向所述终端设备发送所述第二消息,包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that when at least one of the following is satisfied, sending the second message to the terminal device comprises:确定所述目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接;Determining that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU;确定所述IAB节点中的移动终端MT将要切换至所述目标CU;或,Determine that the mobile terminal MT in the IAB node is to be switched to the target CU; or,接收来自所述目标CU的指示允许所述终端设备基于所述切换配置信息执行小区切换。 Receiving the indication from the target CU allows the terminal device to perform a cell switch based on the switching configuration information.
- 根据权利要求7至11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在满足以下任一项时,发送所述第一消息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 11, characterized in that sending the first message when any of the following conditions is met comprises:向所述目标CU发送第一切换请求消息之后,接收来自所述目标CU的第一切换响应消息,所述第一切换响应消息包括所述N个小区的切换配置信息;After sending a first handover request message to the target CU, receiving a first handover response message from the target CU, where the first handover response message includes handover configuration information of the N cells;向所述目标CU发送第二切换请求消息之后,接收来自所述目标CU的第二切换响应消息,所述第二切换请求消息包括所述N个小区的标识且所述N个小区为未激活的小区;或,After sending a second handover request message to the target CU, receiving a second handover response message from the target CU, where the second handover request message includes identifiers of the N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; or,接收来自所述目标DU的第一配置信息并向所述目标CU发送所述第一配置信息之后,接收来自所述目标CU的所述N个小区的切换配置信息,且所述所述N个小区的切换配置信息包括所述第一配置信息和第二配置信息。After receiving the first configuration information from the target DU and sending the first configuration information to the target CU, the switching configuration information of the N cells is received from the target CU, and the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。The method according to claim 12 is characterized in that the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- 根据权利要求9至13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 13, characterized in that the determining that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU comprises:基于来自所述目标CU的第三指示信息确定所述目标DU与目标CU已建立F1连接,所述第三指示信息指示终端设备基于所述切换配置信息执行小区切换。Based on the third indication information from the target CU, it is determined that the target DU has established an F1 connection with the target CU, and the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information.
- 根据权利要求7至14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息包括第一信息,所述第一信息承载于以下任一项:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 14, characterized in that the second message includes first information, and the first information is carried in any one of the following:寻呼无线网络临时标识P-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道PDCCH的下行控制信息DCI中的短消息short message字段;The short message field in the downlink control information DCI of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH scrambled by the paging radio network temporary identifier P-RNTI;寻呼机会PO中的信息;或,The information in the pager PO; or,所述N个小区的任一广播信息。Any broadcast information of the N cells.
- 根据权利要求7至15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 15, characterized in that the first message further includes at least one of the following:第一指示信息,指示所述切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;或,first indication information, indicating that the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by a second message; or,第二指示信息,指示在全部PO上监测所述第二消息。The second indication information indicates to monitor the second message on all POs.
- 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息为广播消息。The method according to claim 16, characterized in that the second message is a broadcast message.
- 根据权利要求7至17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N的取值为1。The method according to any one of claims 7 to 17, characterized in that the value of N is 1.
- 根据权利要求7至18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 18, characterized in that the method further comprises:向所述终端设备发送指示所述切换配置信息对应的小区切换过程取消的指示信息。Send indication information to the terminal device indicating cancellation of the cell switching process corresponding to the switching configuration information.
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:在确定与目标分布式单元DU已建立F1连接之后,确定第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息指示终端设备基于所述切换配置信息执行小区切换,所述目标DU包括所述N个小区,N为正整数;其中,所述切换配置信息用于基于第二消息触发的小区切换过程;After determining that an F1 connection has been established with the target distributed unit DU, determining third indication information, wherein the third indication information instructs the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the switching configuration information, the target DU includes the N cells, N is a positive integer; wherein the switching configuration information is used for a cell switching process triggered by the second message;向所述源CU发送所述第三指示信息。Send the third indication information to the source CU.
- 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述源CU发送所述第三指示信息包括:The method according to claim 20, characterized in that the sending the third indication information to the source CU comprises:在确定所述目标DU已配置所述终端设备的上下文之后,向所述源CU发送所述第三指示信息。 After determining that the target DU has configured the context of the terminal device, the third indication information is sent to the source CU.
- 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,在向所述源CU发送所述第三指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 20 or 21, characterized in that before sending the third indication information to the source CU, the method further comprises:接收来自源集中式单元CU的第二切换请求消息,所述第二切换请求消息包括N个小区的标识且所述N个小区为未激活的小区;其中,所述N个小区位于所述目标DU;receiving a second handover request message from a source centralized unit CU, wherein the second handover request message includes identifiers of N cells and the N cells are unactivated cells; wherein the N cells are located in the target DU;向所述源CU发送第二切换响应消息,所述第二切换响应消息包括所述N个小区的切换配置信息。A second handover response message is sent to the source CU, where the second handover response message includes handover configuration information of the N cells.
- 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,在向所述源CU发送所述第三指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 20 or 21, characterized in that before sending the third indication information to the source CU, the method further comprises:接收来自源集中式单元CU的所述第一配置信息之后,向所述源CU发送所述N个小区的切换配置信息,所述N个小区的切换配置信息包括所述第一配置信息和第二配置信息。After receiving the first configuration information from a source centralized unit CU, the switching configuration information of the N cells is sent to the source CU, where the switching configuration information of the N cells includes the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
- 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括无线链路控制RLC层配置信息和/或媒体接入控制MAC层配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括分组数据汇聚协议PDCP层配置信息和/或服务数据适配协议SDAP层配置信息。The method according to claim 23 is characterized in that the first configuration information includes radio link control RLC layer configuration information and/or media access control MAC layer configuration information, and the second configuration information includes packet data convergence protocol PDCP layer configuration information and/or service data adaptation protocol SDAP layer configuration information.
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理单元和收发单元;A communication device, characterized in that it comprises a processing unit and a transceiver unit;其中,所述处理单元和所述收发单元用于执行权利要求1至24任一项所述的方法。Wherein, the processing unit and the transceiver unit are used to execute the method described in any one of claims 1 to 24.
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与存储器耦合;A communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory;所述存储器用于存储程序或指令;The memory is used to store programs or instructions;所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述程序或指令,以使通信装置实现如权利要求1至24任一项所述的方法。The at least one processor is configured to execute the program or instruction so that the communication device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24.
- 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述系统包括执行权利要求1至6任一项所述方法的通信装置,执行权利要求7至19任一项所述方法的通信装置以及执行权利要求20至24任一项所述方法的通信装置中的至少两个通信装置。A communication system, characterized in that the system includes at least two communication devices among a communication device for executing the method described in any one of claims 1 to 6, a communication device for executing the method described in any one of claims 7 to 19, and a communication device for executing the method described in any one of claims 20 to 24.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述可读存储介质存储有指令,当所述指令被计算机执行时,实现权利要求1至24中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions are executed by a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24 is implemented.
- 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述程序产品包括指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至24中任一项所述的方法。 A computer program product, characterized in that the program product comprises instructions, and when the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202211183378.0A CN117835337A (en) | 2022-09-27 | 2022-09-27 | Communication method and related equipment |
CN202211183378.0 | 2022-09-27 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024066947A1 true WO2024066947A1 (en) | 2024-04-04 |
Family
ID=90475986
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/116926 WO2024066947A1 (en) | 2022-09-27 | 2023-09-05 | Communication method and related device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN117835337A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2024066947A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN112806063A (en) * | 2019-04-30 | 2021-05-14 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Method and device for cell switching |
CN112865943A (en) * | 2021-01-15 | 2021-05-28 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Control information transmission method, electronic equipment and storage medium |
CN113271633A (en) * | 2020-02-14 | 2021-08-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Switching method and communication device |
CN113424583A (en) * | 2019-02-13 | 2021-09-21 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Method and equipment for cell switching |
US20210368407A1 (en) * | 2020-05-19 | 2021-11-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Network triggered handover |
-
2022
- 2022-09-27 CN CN202211183378.0A patent/CN117835337A/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-09-05 WO PCT/CN2023/116926 patent/WO2024066947A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN113424583A (en) * | 2019-02-13 | 2021-09-21 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Method and equipment for cell switching |
CN112806063A (en) * | 2019-04-30 | 2021-05-14 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Method and device for cell switching |
CN113271633A (en) * | 2020-02-14 | 2021-08-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Switching method and communication device |
US20210368407A1 (en) * | 2020-05-19 | 2021-11-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Network triggered handover |
CN112865943A (en) * | 2021-01-15 | 2021-05-28 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Control information transmission method, electronic equipment and storage medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN117835337A (en) | 2024-04-05 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CN114900547B (en) | Communication method and device | |
EP4171122A1 (en) | Method for iab network communication, and related device | |
JP7531688B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE APPLIED TO INTEGRATED ACCESS AND BACKHAUL IAB SYSTEM - Patent application | |
WO2020216133A1 (en) | Communication method and device | |
WO2021026707A1 (en) | Method and device for deactivating iab node | |
US20230112588A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
WO2021238882A1 (en) | Method and device for implementing service continuity | |
EP4124107A1 (en) | Communication method, access network device, terminal device and core network device | |
WO2020015715A1 (en) | Data transmission method and device | |
US20230292164A1 (en) | Electronic device, method, and storage medium for wireless communication system | |
WO2021258766A1 (en) | Method and device for configuring terminal device | |
WO2021258262A1 (en) | Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device | |
WO2023116350A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
WO2023045768A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
WO2024066947A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
WO2021134763A1 (en) | Method, apparatus and device for recovering transmission | |
WO2024169635A1 (en) | Communication method and related device | |
WO2021043386A1 (en) | Communication of terminal with multiple access nodes | |
CN111757559A (en) | Admission control method and device | |
US20230209502A1 (en) | Paging method, device, and storage medium | |
WO2024138295A1 (en) | Method for transmitting data, and terminal device and network device | |
WO2023272669A1 (en) | Paging method and related apparatus | |
WO2024169931A1 (en) | Conditional primary secondary cell change method and apparatus | |
WO2023050181A1 (en) | Wireless communication method and wireless communication apparatus | |
WO2024065137A1 (en) | Configuration information acquisition method, configuration information forwarding method, and terminal device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23870187 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |